Menu

Matthew 25:34 — Word Study

Depth

N1904Τότε ἐρεῖ βασιλεὺς τοῖς ἐκ δεξιῶν αὐτοῦ· δεῦτε οἱ εὐλογημένοι τοῦ πατρός μου, κληρονομήσατε τὴν ἡτοιμασμένην ὑμῖν βασιλείαν ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου.

BSAThentote will sayerō theho Kingbasileus [sovereign ruler, monarch] to thoseho onek [the] right handdexios [side of honor, place of favor] of Him;autos Comedeute [draw near, approach] you who [are]ho blessedeulogeō [highly favored, praised] of theho Fatherpatēr [eternal Parent, heavenly Dad] of mine,egō do inheritklēronomeō [receive as a gift, possess] theho preparedhetoimazō [made ready, established] for yousu kingdombasileia [royal power, dominion] from [the]apo foundationkatabolē [beginning, creation] of [the] world.kosmos [earth]

Word
Listen & take awayMatthew 25
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 34 is in this chapter.
Greek ↓ Download MP3 Nestle 1904 — the very text on this page — read by Andy Martin in Erasmian pronunciation.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (kosmos) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Matthew 25:34quick helps
In a sentenceThe King invites those on His right to come and inherit the kingdom prepared for them.
Who is speakingThe King, representing Jesus, is addressing those favored by His Father.
Where we areThis statement is part of the final judgment scene, where the righteous are separated from the unrighteous.
The hard wordκληρονομήσατε
Take awayThe invitation to inherit the kingdom is a promise of belonging and reward.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subject verbερει The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Matthew 25:34

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The Judgment of the Nationsgenerated

33He will place the sheep on His right and the goats on His left.
34Then the King will say to those on His right, ‘Come, you who are blessed by My Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world.
35For I was hungry and you gave Me something to eat, I was thirsty and you gave Me something to drink, I was a stranger and you took Me in,
36I was naked and you clothed Me, I was sick and you looked after Me, I was in prison and you visited Me.’

Matthew 25:34 describes a moment when the King, representing Christ, addresses those on His right side, inviting them to receive the kingdom that has been prepared for them since the foundation of the world. This scene emphasizes the distinction between the righteous and the unrighteous, as seen in the surrounding verses where the King separates the sheep from the goats, rewarding those who have acted with compassion and kindness.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Matthew 21:5“Say to the Daughter of Zion, ‘See, your King comes to you, gentle and riding on a donkey, on a colt, the foal of a donkey.’”
2Matthew 22:11–13But when the king came in to see the guests, he spotted a man who was not dressed in wedding clothes.
3Matthew 27:37Above His head they posted the written charge against Him: THIS IS JESUS, THE KING OF THE JEWS.
4Psalm 2:6“I have installed My King on Zion, upon My holy mountain.”
5Psalm 24:7–10Lift up your heads, O gates! Be lifted up, O ancient doors, that the King of Glory may enter!

The Key Word κληρονομήσατε, klēronomeōgenerated

The verb κληρονομέω (i.e., klēronomeō) means 'to inherit' and is used in a biblical context to describe receiving a legacy or possession. It is often associated with spiritual inheritance, particularly in relation to the kingdom of God, as seen in passages like Galatians 4:30.

This verb is in the aorist imperative form, indicating a command or urgent invitation to act. The second person plural suggests that the King is addressing a group, inviting them collectively to receive what has been promised.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

In the Berean Standard Bible, the key verb is translated as inherit, which is consistent with the KJV, ASV, and others. These versions maintain the sense of receiving a gift or legacy.

The BBE translates it as do inherit, which shifts the nuance slightly, emphasizing the action of inheriting rather than the state of being an heir. This variation highlights the different approaches to conveying the same essential idea.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb of the verse is ἐρεῖ, will say, which governs the entire sentence. It is followed by a direct address to those on His right, along with a series of phrases that detail the invitation and the promise of inheritance.

The structure includes a noun phrase as the subject ('the King') and several clauses and phrases that elaborate on the action and the recipients, demonstrating how Greek syntax often employs a more complex arrangement than English.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

καταβολὴ occurs in the Septuagint and is used to translate the Hebrew word for 'foundation', indicating a foundational aspect of creation or a beginning. It emphasizes the idea that the kingdom was prepared from the very start.

βασιλεία, meaning 'kingdom', is also found in the Septuagint, often associated with God's reign and authority, reinforcing the concept of divine sovereignty over the world.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Matthew 25:34 shows the King inviting those on His right to come and inherit the kingdom that was prepared for them from the beginning of the world. This highlights God's plan for His people and the blessings that await them.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does it mean to inherit the kingdom?

To inherit the kingdom means to receive a spiritual legacy or reward from God, signifying a place in His eternal reign.

Who are the ones on the right?

The ones on the right are those who have shown kindness and compassion, reflecting the righteous who will be rewarded at the final judgment.

What is the significance of the foundation of the world?

The foundation of the world signifies that God's plan for salvation and His kingdom was established from the very beginning of creation.

How can we be among those who inherit the kingdom?

To be among those who inherit the kingdom, one must live according to God's will, showing love and compassion to others, as taught by Jesus.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. What does it mean to you to be invited to inherit the kingdom of God?
  2. How can you reflect the qualities of those who are blessed by the Father in your daily life?
  3. In what ways do you see God's preparation for His kingdom in the world around you?
  4. How can you share the message of this invitation with others?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Early church Fathers comment on this verse to emphasize the promise of inheritance for the righteous and the justice of God's judgment.

Origen of AlexandriaCatena Aurea by Aquinas c. 185–253
For the Saints who have wrought right works, shall receive in recompense of their right works the King's right hand, at which is rest and glory;
Early Church Fathers on Matthew 25 →
JeromeVerse 34 onwards c. 347–420
Come, you blessed of my Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world. For I was hungry and you gave Me food; I was thirsty and you gave Me drink; I was a stranger and you took Me in;
Early Church Fathers on Matthew 25 →
John ChrysostomHomily on the Gospel of Matthew 79 c. 347–407
Then, in order that thou mayest see in another way also the justice of the sentence, He first praises them that have done right, and saith, "Come, ye blessed of my Father,
Early Church Fathers on Matthew 25 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Matthew 25:34 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

Then shall the king say unto them on his right hand,.... Before Christ is called "the son of man", now "the king"; who is not only king of saints, but king of the whole world; the king of kings, and

Read John Gill on Matthew 25 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

Then shall the King say unto them on his right hand, Come, ye blessed of my Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world: Then shall the King.

Read Robert Jamieson on Matthew 25 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

The King, that is, he who was before called the Son of man, who shall then sit on the throne of his glory; he shall say to his saints, to those on his right hand, those whom he designs to honour and to favour, Come, ye blessed of my Father; you whom my Father hath blessed with all spiritual blessings in me, who were also blessed in his eternal thoughts: for there was a kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world; you have not purchased it by your works; no, it was prepared for you before ever you were. You were blessed in my Father’ s eternal thoughts, so he prepared a kingdom for you; and you have been blessed since with all spiritual blessings through me, so you are now…

Read Matthew Poole on Matthew 25 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

34 Then shall the King say unto them on his right hand, Come, ye blessed of my Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world: Ver. 34. Come, ye blessed of my Father] Paterne alloquitur. As who should say, Where have ye been, my darlings, all this while of my long absence? Come, come, now into my bosom, which is now wide open to receive you, as the most welcome guests that ever accosted me, &c. And surely if Jacob’ s and Joseph’ s meetings were so unspeakably comfortable: if Mary and Elisabeth did so greet and congratulate, oh what shall be the joy of that last day! Inherit the kingdom prepared] Here (as in the Turk’ s court) every man is aut Caesar aut…

Read John Trapp on Matthew 25 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(34) Ye blessed of my Father.—The Greek is not identical with “blessed by my Father,” but means rather, “ye blessed ones who belong to my Father.” Inherit the kingdom prepared for you.—Yes; not for Israel only, or those among the brethren who should in this life believe in Christ, had the kingdom been prepared, but for these also. For those who came from east and west and north and south (Matthew 8:11; Luke 13:29)—for all who in every nation feared God and wrought righteousness (Acts 10:35)—had that kingdom been prepared from everlasting, though it was only through the work of Christ, and by ultimate union with Him, that it could be realised and enjoyed.

Read Charles John Ellicott on Matthew 25 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 34. Ye blessed of my Father] This is the king's address to his followers; and contains the reason why they were found in the practice of all righteousness, and were now brought to this state of glory - they were blessed - came as children, and received the benediction of the Father, and became, and continued to be, members of the heavenly family. Inherit] The inheritance is only for the children of the family - if sons, then heirs, Galatians 4:7, but not otherwise. The sons only shall enjoy the father's estate. Prepared for you] That is, the kingdom of glory is designed for such as you-you who have received the blessing of the Father, and were holy, harmless, undefiled, and separated…

Read AdamClarke on Matthew 25 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

34. the King] “Appellatio majestatis plena solisque piis læta,” Bengel, who also points out the correspondence between the sentence passed on the just, and that passed on the unjust, Matthew 25:41. Come, ye blessed of my Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world. Depart from me, ye cursed, into fire, prepared for the devil and his angels everlasting. ye blessed of my Father] Observe that the words, “of my Father,” do not follow “ye cursed,” Matthew 25:41. The blessing comes from God, the curse is brought by the sinner on himself.

Read Cambridge on Matthew 25 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

The King - That is, the Lord Jesus, the King of Zion and of the universe, now acting as Judge, Luke 19:38; John 18:37; Revelation 17:14; Revelation 19:16. Blessed of my Father - Made happy or raised to felicity by my Father.

Read Albert Barnes on Matthew 25 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

Then the King will say to those on His right, ‘Come, you who are blessed by My Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

Then the King will tell those on his right hand, ‘Come, blessed of my Father, inherit the Kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world;

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

Then the King will say to those on His right, ‘Come, you who are blessed by My Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world.

NETBNew English Translation2006

Then the king will say to those on his right, ‘Come, you who are blessed by my Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

Then shall the King say unto them on his right hand, Come, ye blessed of my Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world:

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

Then shall the King say unto them on his right hand, Come, ye blessed of my Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world:

RVARevised Version, American1894

Then shall the King say unto them on his right hand, Come, ye blessed of my Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world:

NWBWebster's Bible1833

Then will the King say to them on his right hand, Come, ye blessed of my Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world:

GNVGeneva Bible1599

Then shall ye king say to them on his right hand, Come ye blessed of my father: take the inheritance of the kingdome prepared for you from the foundation of the world.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

Then shall the King say to those on his right hand, Come, blessed of my Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from [the] world's foundation:

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

'Then shall the king say to those on his right hand, Come ye, the blessed of my Father, inherit the reign that hath been prepared for you from the foundation of the world;

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

Then the King will say to those on His right hand, Come, the blessed of My Father, inherit the kingdom that has been prepared for you from the foundation of the world;

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

Then the King will say to those on his right hand, 'Come, you who have been blessed by my Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

Then shall the king say to them that shall be on his right hand: Come, ye blessed of my Father, possess you the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

Then the king will say to the ones on his right, ‘Come, you who are blessed by my Father, and inherit the kingdom that's been prepared for you from the beginning of the world.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

Then will the King say to those on his right, Come, you who have the blessing of my Father, into the kingdom made ready for you before the world was:

Word by word, the decisions they made

ἐρεῖerō will say G4483 2 different renderings
will sayBSB FBV LSV MSB NETB ULB
will tellWEB
δεξιῶνdexios [the] right hand G1188 2 different renderings
right handASV DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
rightBBE BSB FBV MSB NETB
εὐλογημένοιeulogeō blessed G2127 2 different renderings
blessedASV BSB DBY DRA FBV GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
blessingBBE
κληρονομήσατεklēronomeō do inherit G2816 2 different renderings
inheritASV BSB DBY FBV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
possessDRA
ἡτοιμασμένηνhetoimazō prepared G2090 2 different renderings
preparedASV BSB DBY DRA FBV GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
made readyBBE
καταβολῆςkatabolē foundation G2602 2 different renderings
foundationASV BSB DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
beginningFBV

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseclauseadverbialτότεThenverbἐρεῖwill saynoun phrase · subjecttheΒασιλεὺςKingnoun phrase · indirect objectτοῖςto thoseprepositional phraseἐκonnoun phraseδεξιῶν[the] right handαὐτοῦof HimclauseverbΔεῦτεComeclausenoun phrasenoun phraseοἱthoseclauseverbεὐλογημένοιbeing blessednoun phraseτοῦof thenoun phraseΠατρόςFatherμουof meclauseverbκληρονομήσατεinheritnoun phrase · objectτὴνthenoun phraseadjective phraseclauseverbἡτοιμασμένηνhaving been preparedindirect objectὑμῖνfor youprepositional phrase · adverbialἀπὸfrom [the]noun phraseκαταβολῆςfoundationκόσμουof [the] worldβασιλείανkingdom

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Tunc dicet rex his qui a dextris ejus erunt : Venite benedicti Patris mei, possidete paratum vobis regnum a constitutione mundi :

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܗܝܕܝܢ ܢܐܡܪ ܡܠܟܐ ܠܗܢܘܢ ܕܡܢ ܝܡܝܢܗ ܬܘ ܒܪܝܟܘܗܝ ܕܐܒܝ ܝܪܬܘ ܡܠܟܘܬܐ ܕܥܬܝܕܐ ܗܘܬ ܠܟܘܢ ܡܢ ܬܪܡܝܬܗ ܕܥܠܡܐ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Τότε ἐρεῖ βασιλεὺς τοῖς ἐκ δεξιῶν αὐτοῦ· δεῦτε οἱ εὐλογημένοι τοῦ πατρός μου, κληρονομήσατε τὴν ἡτοιμασμένην ὑμῖν βασιλείαν ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Τότε ἐρεῖ βασιλεὺς τοῖς ἐκ δεξιῶν αὐτοῦ· δεῦτε οἱ εὐλογημένοι τοῦ πατρός μου, κληρονομήσατε τὴν ἡτοιμασμένην ὑμῖν βασιλείαν ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

Τότε ἐρεῖ βασιλεὺς τοῖς ἐκ δεξιῶν αὐτοῦ· δεῦτε οἱ εὐλογημένοι τοῦ πατρός μου, κληρονομήσατε τὴν ἡτοιμασμένην ὑμῖν βασιλείαν ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

Τότε ἐρεῖ βασιλεὺς τοῖς ἐκ δεξιῶν αὐτοῦ· δεῦτε οἱ εὐλογημένοι τοῦ πατρός μου, κληρονομήσατε τὴν ἡτοιμασμένην ὑμῖν βασιλείαν ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

Τότε ἐρεῖ βασιλεὺς τοῖς ἐκ δεξιῶν αὐτοῦ· δεῦτε οἱ εὐλογημένοι τοῦ πατρός μου, κληρονομήσατε τὴν ἡτοιμασμένην ὑμῖν βασιλείαν ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

Τότε ἐρεῖ βασιλεὺς τοῖς ἐκ δεξιῶν αὐτοῦ· δεῦτε οἱ εὐλογημένοι τοῦ πατρός μου, κληρονομήσατε τὴν ἡτοιμασμένην ὑμῖν βασιλείαν ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

Τότε ἐρεῖ βασιλεὺς τοῖς ἐκ δεξιῶν αὐτοῦ· δεῦτε οἱ εὐλογημένοι τοῦ πατρός μου, κληρονομήσατε τὴν ἡτοιμασμένην ὑμῖν βασιλείαν ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

Τότε ἐρεῖ βασιλεὺς τοῖς ἐκ δεξιῶν αὐτοῦ· δεῦτε οἱ εὐλογημένοι τοῦ πατρός μου, κληρονομήσατε τὴν ἡτοιμασμένην ὑμῖν βασιλείαν ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse all agree
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

Every edition agrees. All 8 printed editions — Nestle-Aland 28, Nestle-Aland 27, SBLGNT, Westcott-Hort, Tregelles, Tyndale House 2017, Textus Receptus (KJV), Byzantine majority — carry every word of this verse, in the same order, with no difference that any translator would render differently.


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Matthew 25:34τότεThenThenτότεερειwill saywill sayερειthetheβασιλεύςKingKingβασιλεύςto thoseto thoseἐκononἐκδεξιός[the] right[the] right hanδεξιόςαὐτόςof Him;of Him;αὐτόςδεῦτεComeComeδεῦτεyou who [aryou who [are]εὐλογέωblessedblessedεὐλογέωof theof theπατήρFatherFatherπατήρμουof mine,of mine,μουκληρονομέωdo inheritdo inheritκληρονομέωthetheἑτοιμάζωpreparedpreparedἑτοιμάζωσύfor youfor youσύβασιλείαkingdomkingdomβασιλείαἀπόfrom [the]from [the]ἀπόκαταβολήfoundationfoundationκαταβολήκόσμοςof [the] woof [the] world.κόσμοςβάσιςn.f. the fn.f. the footβάσιςδέχομαιv. I take,v. I take, receδέχομαιδεῦροAdv. & v. Adv. & v. come,δεῦροἕτοιμοςAdj ready,Adj ready, prepἕτοιμοςβασιλεύςn.m. a kinn.m. a king, ruβασιλεύςκαταβάλλωv. I cast,v. I cast, lay καταβάλλωὅτεAdv whenAdv whenὅτεArticle thArticle theῥέωv. I flowv. I flowῥέωἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦεὖAdv well, Adv well, well εὖλόγοςn.m. a worn.m. a word, spλόγοςκομίζωv. I bringv. I bring, recκομίζωκληρονόμοςn.m. an hen.m. an heir, iκληρονόμοςνηστεύωv. I fastv. I fastνηστεύωἄρχωv. I beginv. I beginἄρχωἈγρίππαςn.m. Agripn.m. AgrippaἈγρίππας
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Matthew 25:34

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
Τότεtote Then G5119 Adverb
159× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for then, used to describe a specific point in time, as seen in Matthew 2:17 and Galatians 4:8. It can refer to concurrent or consequent events, and is often used to introduce a new action or event.
Tyndale gloss
then
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word τότε (i.e., *tote*) is a demonstrative adverb meaning 'then' or 'at that time.' It is used to refer to specific points in the past or future, often in relation to concurrent or consequent events. The New Testament frequently employs it, especially in the Gospel of Matthew, to indicate transitions in narrative or to specify timing.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τότε, demonstr. adv. of time, correlat. of ὅτε,

then, at that time;

of concurrent events: Mt 2:17 3:5 and freq., Ro 6:21; seq. ptcp., Mt 2:16, Ga 4:8; opp. to νῦν, Ga 4:29, He 12:26; ὁ τ. κόσμος, II Pe 3:6;

of consequent events, then, thereupon: Mt 2:7 3:5 4:1 and freq., Lk 11:26; τ. οὖν, Jo 11:14 19:1, 16 20:8; εὐθέως τ., Ac 17:14; ὅτε .…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τότε, demonstr. ady. of time, (fr. the neut. art. τό, and the enclit. τέ [q. v.]; answering to the relative ore [Kiihner $506, 2 ¢.]), fr. Hom. down, then; at that time; a. then i.e. at the time when the things under consideration were taking place, (of a concomitant event): Mt. ii. 17 (τότε ἐπληρώθη) ; iii. 9, 13; xii. 22, 38; xv. 1; xix. 13; xx. 20; xxvii.9, 16; Ro. vi. 21; foll. by a more precise specification of the time by means of an added participle, Mt. ii. 16; Gal. iv. 8; opp. to νῦν, Gal. iv. 29; Heb. xii. 26; 6 τότε κόσμος, the world that then was, 2 Pet. iii. 6. b. then i. e. when the thing under consideration had been said or done, thereupon; so in the historical writers (esp. Matthew), by way of transition from one thing mentioned to another which could not take place before it [W. 540 (503); B. § 151, 31 fin.]: Mt. iv. 1,5; xxvi. 14; xxvii. 38; Actsi.12; x. 48; xxi. 33…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τότε (tote) — then.

τότε,

Doric dialect τόκᾰ (which see) (both forms in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect τότᾰ [Refs 7th c.BC+] accusative to codices of [Refs 3rd c.BC+], compare ποτα, ὄτα):— adverb at that time, then, corresponding to Relat. ὅτε or ὁπότε (below [Refs]; mostly of some point in past time, opposed to νῦν, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also of a future time, τότε κέν μιν.. πεπίθοιμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+] (or of imagined circumstances, in that case [Refs 5th c.BC+]; sometimes, then, next, πρῶτον μὲν.., εἶτα.., καὶ τ... [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—in Trag. and Attic dialect also in indefinite sense, formerly, καὶ νῦν θ᾽ ὁμοίως καὶ τότ᾽ ἐξεπίσταμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]just now, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τ. μὲν.., νῦν δὲ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]at one time or other, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τότε

tote

from (the neuter of) 3588 and 3753; the when, i.e. at the time that

(of the past or future, also in consecution):--that time, then.

see GREEK for 3753

see GREEK for 3588

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τότε

Adv

then

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τότε tote 160x

then, at that time, Mt. 2:17; 3:5; 11:20; then, Mt. 12:29; 13:26; 25:31; ἀπὸ τότε, from that time, Mt. 4:17; 16:21; ὁ τότε, which then was, 2 Pet. 3:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

τότε at that time, then, Lat. tunc, Antec. to Relat. ὅτε or ὁπότε, opp. to νῦν, Il., Hom., etc.:—also in indef. sense, in those times, formerly, Soph., etc.; τότ᾽ ἢ τότε at one time or other, Aesch., Eur.

joined with other Particles, καὶ τότε δή Hom.; καὶ τότ᾽ ἔπειτα Il.; τότε δή ῥα Od., etc.; τότ᾽ ἤδη then at length, Hes.

with the Article, οἱ τότε the men of that time, Il., etc.; οἱ τότε ἄνθρωποι Hdt.; τῇ τόθ᾽ ἡμέρᾳ Soph.; ἐν τῷ τότε (sc. χρόνῳ) Thuc.

εἰς τότε until then, Dem.; ἐκ τότε or ἐκτότε since then, Plut.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
91%then
then91% · 148×at that time5% · 8×that time2% · 4×other renderings1% · 2×

162 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial99%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 159 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
σύνυμφίοςa bridegroomδοκόςa beam
ἀπό
καίand, even, also,ἸωάννηςJohn
δέbut, on the other ha
ἔχωI have, hold, poεὐθέωςimmediately, soo
ἸησοῦςJesus
Article theδοξάζωI glorify, honor
ἀσθενέωI am weak, sick
ὅτιthat, since, becγάρfor
τότεThen159×
what comes after →
Article the
ΠαῦλοςPaulἸησοῦςJesusἐν
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theεἰς
ἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
αὐτόςArticle theκαίand, even, also,
ἄρχωI begin
λέγωI say, speakArticle theὀνειδίζωI reproach, revi
προσέρχομαιI come near, consent
Article theαὐτόςἐπιβάλλωI throw upon, la

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτότε · 159× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John 1 Corinthians Mark Galatians Hebrews 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians 2 Peter 2 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament14 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 102 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 88c. AD 40

οἱ μὲν γὰρ ὑστερίζοντες τῶν ὑποζυγίων καὶ κατόπιν αὐτῶν ἐξεταζόμενοι ᾗ ἂν ἐθέλωσιν αὐτὰ ἄγουσι τῶν ἡνιῶν ἐνειλημμένοι καὶ τοτὲ μὲν ἐφιέντες πρὸς ὀξὺν δρόμον τοτὲ δ’ ἀναχαιτίζοντες, εἰ φορᾷ τοῦ δέοντος πλείονι θέοι·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 3.4c. AD 100

τότε ῥαγήσεται πρώϊμον τὸ φῶς σου, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτιά σου ταχέως ἀνατελεῖ, καὶ προπορεύσεται ἔμπροσθέν σου ἡ δικαιοσύνη, καὶ ἡ δόξα τοῦ θεοῦ περιστελεῖ σε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. BC
C.Erbstreit16Diospolis Magna (Theben)135 BC

καὶ ἐν ἄλληι σφραγῖδι ἄλλων ἀρουρῶν ι, πασῶν περὶ Παθῦριν, ἐπέδωκαν ὑπόμνημα … τῷ τοτε στρατηγῶι κατά τε ἡμῶν καὶ τοῦ τῆς Σενενούπιος … Θράσωνος. τούτων ἀδίκως ἐνποιούμενοι και

P.Amh. 2 77Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 139

ὅπερ φανερὸν τοῦτο ἐγένετο τοῖς τε τῆς νομαρχίας ἐπιτηρηταῖς καὶ τῷ ἐπὶ τῶν τόπων τότε ὄντι βενεφικιαρίωι

ÉdP 5 (1939), p. 94Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 298

σιτικὰς δημοσίας ἀρούρας ταῖς μὴ δυναμέναις ὑπαντᾶν τοῖς φόροις τῶν ἀρουρῶν. προσήλθαμεν δὲ καὶ τότε τῷ γενομένῳ πρωτοστάτῃ τῆς κώμης Σερήνῳ τῷ καὶ Ἁρποκρᾷ καὶ ἐκέλευσεν αὐτὸν ἅπαντα τὰ

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
ἐρεῖerō will say G4483 Verb · future · active · indicative · third person · singular
95× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Tyndale gloss
to say
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — λαλέω, λέγω, λαλιά, λόγος from a scan

In dealing with synonyms of the N. T. we plainly need not concern ourselves with such earlier, or even contemporary, uses of the words which we are discriminating, as lie altogether outside of the N. T. sphere, when these uses do not illustrate, and have not affected, their Scriptural employment. It follows from this that all those contemptuous uses of λαλεῖν as to talk at random, as one ἀθυρόστομος, or with no door to his lips, might do; of λαλιά, as chatter («Kpacia λόγου ἄλογος, Plato, Defin. 416)—for I cannot believe that we are to find this at John iv. 42—may be dismissed and set aside. The antithesis in the line of Eupolis (Meineke, /ragm. Com. Gr. p. 174), Λαλεῖν ἄριστος, ἀδυνατώτατος λέγειν, does little or nothing to illustrate the matter in hand. The distinction which indeed exists between the words may in this way be made clear. There are two leading aspects under which speech…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λέγω,

[in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Ge 22:16, al.;]

in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount.

In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Ac 13:15 24:10; seq. orat. dir., Mt 9:34, Mk 3:11, Jo 1:29, al.; seq. ὅτι recit., Mk 3:21, Lk 1:24, Jo 6:14, al.; acc. et. inf., Lk 11:18, Jo 12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mt 11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λέγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἔλεγαν, Jn. xi. 56 Tdf. [ef. ἔχω, init.]): I. in its earliest use in Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; οἵ. J. G. Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius § 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect, gather; to pick out. 2. lo lay with, count with; to enumerate, recount, narrate, describe; [οἷ. Eng. tale, Germ. ztihlen). II. to put word to word in speaking, join words together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. λαλεῖν, see under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in 1]. 2, 222 [yet ef. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48, 2; L. and S. s. vy. B. II. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com. use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for 728; often also for D8} (saying, dictum); very rarely for 1393; and soin N.T. 1. univ. a. absol. to…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λέγω. (1). “‘I say, speak”: see e.g. P Par 47 {= Selections, Ῥ- 21 ff.), ¢. B.C. 153, which is addressed on the verso—mpds τοὺς τὴν ἀλήθεαν λέγοντες (—-as), P Fay 12378 (c. A.D. 100) γνώσομαι yap εἰ ἀληθῶς λέγι, “1 will find out whether he is speaking the truth,” P Ryl 11. 7615 (late li/A.D.) ἃ καὶ ἀναγνώσομαι λεγομένου τοῦ [π]ράγματος, “1 will read them when the case is argued” (Edd.), P Flor II. 1327 (A.D. 257) ἔλεζξ]αν πεποιηκέναι ταῦτα ἀγνοίᾳ, ‘they said they had done this in ignorance,” and the magical P Par 5741238 (iii/A.D.) (= Selectzons, p. 113) λόγος λεγόμενος ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, ‘ invocation to be uttered over the head (of the possessed one).”” For the phrase τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν, cf. I Cor 11°, Weiss (Meyer 15 ad 1) cites a sepulchral inscr. of husband and wife from Rhodes, /J/Ae 149 (ii/B.c.) ταὐτὰ λέγοντες ταὐτὰ φρονοῦντες ἤλθομεν τὰν ἀμέτρητον ὁδὸν εἰς ᾿Αἴδαν. (2). Closely…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐρέω (rheō, ereō) — to say.

ἐρέω,

__BIonic dialect for ἐρῶ, I will say; see at {ἐρῶ}.

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ρJέω λέγω

rheo

ereo er-eh'-o is used; and both as alternate for 2036

perhaps akin (or identical) with 4482 (through the idea of pouring

forth); to utter, i.e. speak or say:--command, make, say, speak (of).

Compare 3004.

see GREEK for 2036

see GREEK for 4482

see GREEK for 3004

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λέγω legō 2x

to lay, to arrange, to gather; to say, Mt. 1:20; to speak, make an address or speech, Acts 26:1; to say mentally, in thought, Mt. 3:9; Lk. 3:8; to say in written language, Mk. 15:28; Lk. 1:63; Jn. 19:37; to say, as distinguished from acting, Mt. 23:3; to mention, speak of, Mk. 14:71; Lk. 9:31; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ῥέω to flow, run, stream, gush, Hom., etc.:—with dat. of that which flows, πηγὴ ῥέει ὕδατι the fountain runs with water, Il.; ῥέεν αἵματι γαῖα id. Il.; ῥεῖ γάλακτι πέδον Eur.; of a river, μέγας ῥεῖ runs with full stream, Hdt.; so, πολὺς ῥεῖ, metaph. of men, Aesch.; of a river, also, ῥ. ἀπὸ χιόνος to derive its stream from melted snow, Hdt.:—proverb., ἄνω ῥέειν to flow backwards, of impossibilities, Eur.

metaph. of things, ἐκ χειρῶν βέλεα ῥέον from their hands rained darts, Il.; of a flow of words, ἀπὸ γλώσσης μέλιτος γλυκίων ῥέεν αὐδή id. Il.; absol., of the tongue, to run glibly, Aesch. (cf. Hor., salso multoque fluenti): of words or sentiments, to be current, Soph.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-FAI-3S — Verb · future · active · indicative · third person · singular
future active indicative — an action still to come.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-FAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Future Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
20%will say
will say20% · 9×you will say13% · 6×he will say13% · 6×will we say?11% · 5×i will say9% · 4×they will say7% · 3×will we say4% · 2×will he say4% · 2×other renderings20% · 9×

46 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 16 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
ho the G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
βασιλεὺςbasileus King G935 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
115× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A king is a sovereign ruler, as described in Matthew 1:6 and 2:1. This term is used for human rulers, like Herod, and for God as the ultimate king.
Amplified meaning
sovereign ruler, monarch
Tyndale gloss
king
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

βασιλεύς (basileus) means 'king' and is used for various rulers, including emperors and the Messiah. It appears in the New Testament in contexts referring to earthly kings, such as Herod and the Roman Emperor, as well as to God and Christ. The term has roots in both classical and biblical Greek, where it signifies authority and leadership.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

βασιλεύς, -έως, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for מֶלֶךְ;]

a king: Mt 1:6 2:1; used by courtesy of Herod the Tetrarch, Mt 14:9; of the Roman Emperor, as freq. in κοινή (Deiss., LAE, p. 367), I Pe 2:13, 17; of the Christ, in the phrase ὁ β. τ. Ἰουδαίων, Mt 2:2, al.; τοῦ Ἰσραήλ, Mk 15:32, Jo 1:50 12:13; of God, Mt 5:35, I Ti 1:17, Re 15:3; β. βασιλέων, Re 17:14 19:16; β. τ. βασιλευόντων, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

βασιλεύς, -€ws, 6, leader of the people, prince, commander, lord of the land, king; univ.: οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς, Mt. xvii. 25; Rev. xvi. 14[L T Tr WH om. τῆς γῆς ]» ete.; τῶν ἐθνῶν, Lk. xxii. 25; of the king of Egypt, Acts vii. 10, 18; Heb. xi. 23, 27; of David, Mt.i. 6; Acts xiii. 22; of Herod the Great and his successors, Mt. ii. 1 sqq.; Lk.i.5; Acts xii. 1; xxv. 13; of a tetrarch, Mt. xiv. 9; Mk. vi. 14, 22, (of the son of aking, Xen. oec. 4, 16 ; “reges Syriae, regis Antiochi pueros, scitis Romae nuper fuisse,” Cic. Verr. ii. 4, 27, cf. de senectute 17,59; [Verg. Aen. 9, 2287); of a Roman emperor, 1 Tim. ii. 2; 1 Pet. ii. 17, cf. Rev. xvii. 9 (10), (so in prof. writ. in the Roman age, as in Joseph. b. j. 5, 13, 6; Hdian. 2, 4, 8 [4 Bekk.]; of the son of the emperor, ibid. 1, 5, 15 [5 Bekk.]); of the Messiah, ὁ βασιλεὺς τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, Mt. ii. 2, ete.; τοῦ Ἰσραήλ, Mk. xv. 32; Jn. i. 49…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

βασιλεύς. In a letter written not later than B.C. 334 the title of βασιλεύς is adopted by Alexander the Great (Priene 1), and it was a favourite designation of his successors in the Syrian , βασιλεύω and Egyptian monarchies. In this way it became familiar to the Jews of the Dispersion; and when found in the Septuagint as the translation of their vernacular title would be “instinct with present meaning and full of absorbing associations,” as Hicks (C2 i. p. 7) has’ pointed ‘out? In the NT it was transferred to the Roman Emperor (1 Tim 25, 1 Pet 215 17) in accordance with common usage, as borne out by the inscriptions, e.g. 7G IIT. 12", 17°(time of Hadrian), C/G 11. 2721" (time of the Antonines), and the other examples cited by *Magie, p. 62. Similarly Deissmann (LAE, p. 367 f.) brings forward evidence to show that the full title βασιλεὺς βασιλέων (as Rev 1715, 197%) was again “ΕἼ very…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

βασιλεύς (basileus) — king.

βᾰσῐλ-εύς, ὁ,

genitive έως, Epic dialect ῆος, [Refs 5th c.AD+] Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+] Aeolic dialect -ηες[Refs 7th c.BC+] old Attic dialect -ῆς[Refs 5th c.BC+]:— king, chief, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently with collateral sense of captain or judge, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later, hereditary king, opposed to τύραννος, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but also of tyrants, as Hiero, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of Gelo, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of Pisistratus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: joined with a substantive, βασιλεὺς ἀνήρ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄναξ β. lord king, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἰωνῶν β., of the eagle, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: comparative βασιλεύτερος more kingly, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: superlative βασιλεύτατος [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

βασιλεύς

basileus

probably from 939 (through the notion of a foundation of power); a

sovereign (abstractly, relatively, or figuratively):--king.

see GREEK for 939

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

βασιλεύς, έως, ὁ

n.m.

a king, ruler, emperor

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

βασιλεύς basileus 115x

a king, monarch, one possessing regal authority

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

βασιλεύς deriv. uncertain a king, chief, Hom.: later it was an hereditary king, opp. to τύραννος, Hdt., attic; ἄναξ β. lord king, Aesch.: c. gen., β. νεῶν id. Aesch.; οἰωνῶν β., of the eagle, id=id. Aesch.:—Hom. has a comp. βασιλεύτερος more of a king, more kingly, Sup. βασιλεύτατος most kingly.

of the king's son, prince, or any one sharing in the government, Od.

generally, a lord, master, householder, Il., Pind.

at Athens, the second of the nine Archons was called βασιλεύς; he had charge of the public worship, and the conduct of criminal processes, Plat., etc.

after the Persian war, the king of Persia was called βασιλεύς (without the Art.), Hdt., attic; more rarely ὁ βασιλεύς, or ὁ μέγας βας. Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

King

Is in Scripture very generally used to denote one invested with authority, whether extensive or limited. There were thirty-one kings in Canaan (Josh. 12:9, 24), whom Joshua subdued. Adonibezek subdued seventy kings (Judg. 1:7). In the New Testament the Roman emperor is spoken of as a king (1 Pet. 2:13, 17); and Herod Antipas, who was only a tetrarch, is also called a king (Matt. 14:9; Mark 6:22).

This title is applied to God (1 Tim. 1:17), and to Christ, the Son of God (1 Tim. 6:15, 16;

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Called KING OF KINGS Ezr 7:12; Eze 26:7; Da 2:37

→ Divinely authorized De 17:15; 1Sa 9:16,17; 16:12; 1Ch 22:10; 2Ch 2:11,12; Pr 8:15; Da 2:21,37; 4:17; 5:20; Ho 8:4; 13:11

→ How chosen

By divine appointment, Saul 1Sa 10:1

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
73%king
king73% · 84×kings23% · 27×o king3% · 3×other renderings1% · 1×

115 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject32%predicate21%adverbial17%object16%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 115 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,ὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
δέbut, on the otheἡγεμώνa governorπροφήτηςa prophet, poet
δέbut, on the other ha
Article the
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the hu
οὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
χαίρωI rejoice, am glad
λέγωI say, speakαὐτός
βασιλεύςKing115×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸουδαῖοςJewishγῆthe earth, soil,ἔθνοςa race, people,
καίand, even, also, nam
πᾶςall, the whole, Article theἡγεμώνa governor
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theσύἐγώ
σύ
ἔρχομαιI come, goσταυρόωI crucify
ἈγρίππαςAgrippa
ὅπωςhow, in order thἡγέομαιI lead, thinkοὐNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceβασιλεύς · 115× in the New Testament
Matthew Revelation Acts John Mark Luke Hebrews 1 Timothy 1 Peter 2 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 887 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 56c. AD 40

τοῦ δὴ σύμπαντος χρόνου διανεμηθέντος εἰς δύο τμήματα, ἡμέραν τε καὶ νύκτα, τῆς μὲν ἡμέρας τὸ κράτος ὁ πατὴρ ἀνεδίδου τῷ ἡλίῳ, οἷα μεγάλῳ βασιλεῖ, τῆς δὲ νυκτὸς σελήνῃ καὶ τῷ πλήθει τῶν ἄλλων ἀστέρων.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.10c. AD 75–95

Εὗρον τοίνυν, ὅτι Πτολεμαίων μὲν ὁ δεύτερος μάλιστα δὴ βασιλεὺς περὶ παιδείαν καὶ βιβλίων συναγωγὴν σπουδάσας ἐξαιρέτως ἐφιλοτιμήθη τὸν ἡμέτερον νόμον καὶ τὴν κατʼ αὐτὸν διάταξιν τῆς πολιτείας εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα φωνὴν μεταβαλεῖν,

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.4c. AD 100

λέγει δὲ οὕτως καὶ ὁ προφήτης: Βασιλεῖαι δέκα ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς βασιλεύσουσιν, καὶ ἐξαναστήσεται ὄπισθεν μικρὸς βασιλεύς, ὃς ταπεινώσει τρεῖς ὑφ̓ ἓν τῶν βασιλέων.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC 1st c. BC 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

ἐπιπορευομένωι ἄκυρος ἔστω, καὶ προσαποτεισάτω ὁ ἐπελθὼν ἐπίτιμον παραχρῆμα χαλκοῦ τάλαντα ϛ καὶ ἱερὰς βασιλεῦσιν ἀργυρίου ἐπισήμου δραχμὰς ρκ καὶ μηθὲν ἧσσον ἐπάναγκον αὐτῷ ἔστω ποιεῖν κατὰ τὰ προγεγραμμένα.

P.Bad. 2 16Pathyris89 BC

κεχειροτονημένα. καλῶς ποιήσετε συνγεινόμενοι εἰς τοῦτον τόπον ἐν ἀσφαλείαι ὑπάρχοντα συντηρηθῆναι τοῦτον τῶι κυρίωι βασιλεῖ· οὕτω γὰρ πράσσοντες καὶ τὴν πρὸς τὰ πράγματα εὔνοιαν διατηροῦντες … ε … παρὰ

Chrest.Wilck. 12Pathyris89 BC

ὁ ἀδελφὸς διʼ ὧν κεκόμικεν ἡμῖν Ὄρσης γραμμάτων περὶ τοῦ τὸν μέγιστον Θεὸν Σωτῆρα βασιλέα ἐπιβεβληκέναι εἰς Μέμφιν, Ἱέρακα δὲ προκεχειρίσθαι μετὰ δυνάμεων μυρίων ἐπὶ καταστολὴν τῆς Θηβαίδος. ὅπως

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
τοῖςho to those G3588 Article · dative · plural · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DPN — Article · dative · plural · neuter
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DPN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
to those19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
ἐκek on G1537 Preposition
913× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The preposition 'out from' shows movement or origin, like in John 6:31 and Acts 9:3. It helps us understand where people or things come from or are going.
Tyndale gloss
out from
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐκ (transliterated as ek) is a preposition that means 'from' or 'out of,' governing the genitive case. It indicates origin, separation, or motion away from a place, time, or cause. In the New Testament, it is used to denote various relationships, such as source or distinction, and appears in contexts like John 6:31 and Matthew 1:3. Different lexicons highlight its versatility in both literal and metaphorical senses.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐκ (ἐξ),

prep. c. gen.,

from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492).

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ,

prep. c. gen.,

of motion outwards, separation from (opp. to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from.

Of Place,

of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jo 6:31, Ac 9:3, Ga 1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mt 8:28 17:9, Mk 1:25 7:28, Jo 1:33 20:1, Ac 12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας.) ἐκ, Ju 5, Ac 28:4. Metaph., Mt 7:4, 5, I Pe 2:9; ἐκ τ.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, a preposition governing the genitive. It denotes as well exit or emission out of, as separation from, something with which there has been close connection ; opp. to the prepositions εἰς into and ἐν in: from out of, out from, forth from, from, (Lat. e, ex), [ οἵ. W. 364, 366 (343) sq.; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used I. of Pace, and 1. univ. of the place from which; from a surrounding or enclosing place, from the interior of: ἄρτος, ἄγγελος, φῶς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Jn. vi. 81 sq.; Acts ix. 3 [here RG ἀπό]; Gal. 1. 8; ἀνατολή, δύναμις ἐξ ὕψους, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; esp. after verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, freeing, removing, releasing, etc. : ἥκειν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας eis τ. Γαλιλαίαν, Jn. iv. 47; ἐξέρχεσθαι ἔκ τινος out of the body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25; v. 8 [here L mrg. ἀπό]; vii. 29; of power emanating from the body, Mk. v. 30 [cf. B. 301 (258)…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐκ 190 passages as P Tebt I. 23" (c. B.C. 119 or 114) οὐκ ὀρθῶς κρίνομεν πέπρακταί σοι μὴ ἐκ τῆς ἡμῶν προεδρίας πεφροντικέναι ἀπροσδέητον ἑτέρων γενέσθαι, ‘I consider that you have acted badly in not having been careful that he should be independent of others owing to my superior rank ”’ (Edd. ), 24. 248° (B.c. 117) ἔκ τε τῆς πλείστης προσεδρείας, ‘on account of the prolonged attendance ’’ (Edd.), and P Fay 12} (c. B.C. 103) ἐκ κοινολογ[ς(]α[ς] τ[ἢ]ς συνσταθείσης πρὸς αὐτούς, ‘‘as the result of the colloquy which took place between τ᾿ (Edd.). From this it is an easy transition to the meaning ‘‘ according to”’ or “in accordance with,’’ as in the common legal phrase καθάπερ ἐγ δίκης, ‘‘as if in accordance with a legal decision,’’ z. δ. ‘‘as if a formal decree of the court had been obtained,’’ as in P Eleph 1132 (B.C. 311-0) (= Selections, p- 3), P Ryl 11. 15435 (a.p. 66): cf. P Petr III.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐκ (ek) — out from.

ἐκ,

before a vowel ἐξ, also

__A ἐξ τῳ ϝοίκῳ [Refs] and less frequently ; ἐγ- in Inscrr. before β γ δ λ μ ; Cretan dialect and Boeotian dialect ἐς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἐχ frequently in Attic dialect Inscrr. before χ φ θ (and in early Inscrr. before ς, [Refs]:—preposition governing GEN. only (except in [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—radical sense, from out of, frequently also simply, from.

__A.I OF PLACE, the most frequently usage, variously modified:

__A.I.1 of Motion, out of, forth from, ἐκ Πύλου ἐλθὼν τηλόθεν ἐξ ἀπίης γαίης [Refs 8th c.BC+] to strike with a spear in the hand, opposed to ἀντιτοξεύειν or ἀκοντίζειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκ χρυσῶν φιαλῶν πίνειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐκ

ek

or ex ex

a primary preposition denoting origin (the point whence action or

motion proceeds), from, out (of place, time, or cause; literal or

figurative; direct or remote):--after, among, X are, at,

betwixt(-yond), by (the means of), exceedingly, (+ abundantly above),

for(- th), from (among, forth, up), + grudgingly, + heartily, X

heavenly, X hereby, + very highly, in, ...ly, (because, by reason) of,

off (from), on, out among (from, of), over, since, X thenceforth,

through,

X unto, X vehemently, with(-out). Often used in composition,

with the same general import; often of completion.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐκ, ἐξ

Prep.

from out, out from among, from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐκ ek 915x

ἐχ before vowels, with genitive, from, out of, a place, Mt. 2:15; 3:17; of, from, out of, denoting origin or source, Mt. 1:3; 21:19; of, from some material, Mt. 3:9; Rom. 9:21; of, from, among, partitively, Mt. 6:27; 21:31; Mk. 9:17; from, denoting cause, Rev. 8:11; 17:6; means or instrument, Mt. 12:33, 37; by, through, denoting the author or efficient cause, Mt. 1:18; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐκ

ἐξ before a vowel, ἐγ before β γ δ λ μ prep. governing GEN. only, Lat. e, exRadical sense, from out of, opp. to εἰς:

out of, from. c. gen.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, out of, forth from, Hom., etc.: ἐκ θυμοῦ φίλεον I loved her from my heart, with all my heart, Il.

to denote change from one place or condition to another, κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ one evil from (or after) another, id. Il.; λόγον ἐκ λόγου λέγειν Dem.

to express distinction from a number, ἐκ πόλεων πίσυρες four out of many, Il.

of Position, like ἔξω, outside of, beyond, ἐκ βελέων out of shot, id. Il.; ἐκ καπνοῦ out of the smoke, Od.

with Verbs of Rest, ἐκ ποταμοῦ χρόα νίζετο washed his body with water from the river, id. Od.:—with Verbs signifying to hang or fasten, ἐκ πασσαλόφι κρέμασεν φόρμιγγα he hung his lyre from (i. e. on) the peg, id.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

On

Light; the sun, (Gen. 41:45, 50), the great seat of sun-worship, called also Bethshemesh (Jer. 43:13) and Aven (Ezek. 30:17), stood on the east bank of the Nile, a few miles north of Memphis, and near Cairo, in the north-east. The Vulgate and the LXX. Versions have “Heliopolis” (“city of the sun”) instead of On in Genesis and of Aven in Ezekiel. The “city of destruction” Isaiah speaks of (19:18, marg. “of Heres;” Heb. ‘Ir-ha-heres, which some MSS. read Ir-ha-heres, i.e., “city of the sun”) may be the name given to On, the prophecy being that the time will come when that city which was known as the “city of the sun-god” shall become the “city of destruction” of the sun-god, i.e., when idolatry shall cease, and the worship…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(abode or city of the sun), a town of lower Egypt, called BETH-SHEMESH in (Jeremiah 43:13) On is better known under its Greek name Heliopolis. It was situated on the east side of the Pelusiac branch of the Nile, just below the point of the Delta, and about twenty miles northeast of Memphis. The chief object of worship at Heliopolis was the sun, whose temple, described by Strabo, is now only represented by the single beautiful obelisk, of red granite so feet 2 inches high above the pedestal which has stood for more than 4000 years, having been erected by Usirtesen, the second king of the twelfth dynasty. Heliopolis was anciently famous for its learning, and Eudoxus and Plato studied under its priests. The first mention of this place in the Bible is in the history of Joseph, to whom we read Pharaoh gave "to wife Asenath the daughter…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

See HELIOPOLIS.

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

pain; force; iniquity

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%of
of28% · 258×from26% · 243×out of23% · 216×out from7% · 61×by5% · 51×at2% · 20×other renderings8% · 70×other renderings1% · 14×

933 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 26 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial69%predicate15%subject11%object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becἀνάστασιςa rising again,
αὐτός
ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, ἀνίστημιI raise up, set καταβαίνωI go down, come
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegArticle theτίςIrg
εἷςone
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becαὐτός
ἐκon913×
what comes after →
Article the
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaθεόςGod, a godστόμαthe mouth, speec
αὐτός
εἰμίI am, existArticle theκαίand, even, also,
νεκρόςdead, a corpse
ἀνίστημιI raise up, set ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, καίand, even, also,
σύ
παραδίδωμιI hand over, delμεριμνάωI am anxious, diἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
πίστιςfaith, belief, trust
ζάωI liveἸησοῦςJesusἀλλάbut, except

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐκ · 913× in the New Testament
John Revelation Luke Acts Matthew Mark Romans Galatians 1 Corinthians 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
δεξιῶνdexios [the] right hand G1188 Adjective · genitive · plural · neuter
54× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Means the right side or hand, often used in the Bible to describe something done with the right hand, like in Matthew 5:29 and John 18:10.
Amplified meaning
side of honor, place of favor
Tyndale gloss
right
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word δεξιός (i.e., *dexios*) means 'right' and is used to denote the right hand or side, contrasting with the left (ἀριστερός). It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as referring to the right hand of God (Acts 2:33) and positions of honor (Matthew 20:21). The lexicons also note its metaphorical uses, including meanings related to skill and fortune.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δεξιός, -ά, -όν

[in LXX chiefly for יָמִין ;]

the right: Mt 5:29, Jo 18:10, al.; ὅπλα δ., weapons carried in the right hand, i.e. for offence, II Co 6:7 ; ἡ δ. χείρ, Mt 5:30, Lk 6:6, al.; ἡ δ. (sc. χείρ), Mt 6:3, al.; ἐπὶ τὴν δ., in the right hand (R, txt., on R, mg.), Re 5:1; διδόναι τὴν δ., in friend­ship (Deiss., BS, 251), Ga 2:9; metaph. of power, τῇ δ. αὐτοῦ, Ac 2:33 5:31; τὰ δ., the right side, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δεξιός, -c, -dv, (fr. δέχομαι, fut. δέξομαι, or fr. δέκω, which is akin to deixvyse; prop. of that hand which is wont to take hold of as well as to point out; just as ἄξιος comes fr. ἄξω, fut. of ἄγω ; [cf. Curtius §§ 11, 266]), the right: Mt. ν. 29, 39; Lk. xxii. 50; Jn. xviii. 10; Rev. x. 2; ἡ δεξιὰ χείρ, Mt. v. 30; Lk. vi. 6; Acts iii. 7; Rev. i. 16; xiii. 16; and (with χείρ omitted) ἡ δεξιά (like ἡ ἀριστερά), Mt. vi. 3; xxvii. 29; Rev. i. 20; 11. 1; ν. 7; ἐπὶ τὴν δεξιάν [on the right hand i. 6.1 at the right side, Rev. y. 1 [but al. take it more closely, in the right hand; cf. vs. 7 and xx. 1]; διδόναι τὴν δεξιάν or τὰς δεξιάς, to pledge either a mutual friendship, or a compact, by joining the right hands: Gal. ii. 9 (1 Mace. vi. 58; xi. 50, 62, 66; xiii. 50; 2 Mace. xi. 26; xii. 11; xiii. 22; ef. Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. pp. 566 and 599; and in prof. auth. as Xen. an. 1, 6, 6; 2,5…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεξιός. P Magd 245 (B.C. 217) Ψενοβάστις τῆι αὐτῆι δεξιᾶι χειρὶ ἐπισπασαμένη τῆς ἀ[ναβολῆς τοῦ ἱματίου ---α5 completed by Wilcken Archiv vi. p. 274. P Tebt I. 39% (B.c. 114) ἐτραυματίσαν τὴν γυναῖκά μου εἰς τὴν δεξιὰν χεῖρα, P Oxy X. 1252 vwersoii19 (Α. Ὁ. 288-05) ἐγὼ . . . χειροτονη[θεὶς διὰ] τῆς εὐτυχοῦς σου δεξιᾶς, “1 having been appointed by your propitious right hand” (Edd.). For δεξιά = ““ pledge” see P Fay 124} (ii/A.D.) πάνυ yap μοι δοκεῖς ἄφρων tis εἶν]αι... μὴ φυλάσστι]ν σου τὴν δεξιάν, “‘indeed you appear to me to be quite mad in not keeping your pledge ” (Edd.). Cf. P Leid Z* (a.p. 391-2) εἴωθεν ἡ ὑμετέρα φ[ιλ]ανθρωπία πᾶσιν τοῖς δεομένοις χεῖρ[α] δεξιὰν [dpe] yerv. So P Oxy IIT. 53318 (ii/iii a.p.) ἵνα τηρήσωσι αὐτῶν τὴν δεξιάν. For the phrase of Mt 207! etc. cf. P kyl IT. 154% (A.D. 66) οὐλ(ὴ) μετώπωι ἐγ δεξιῶν, P Tebt II. 373% (a.p. 110-1 οὐλὴ στέρ[ν]ῳι ἐγ δεξιῶν. A…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δεξιός (dexios) — right.

δεξιός, ά, όν,

on the right hand or side, opposed to ἀριστερός, δ. μαζός, γλουτός, ὦμος, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸ δ. (i.e. κέρας) the right of an army, [Refs 5th c.BC+] on or to the right, νωμῆσαι βῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπὶ δεξιόφιν (Epic dialect genitive) towards the right, [NT+8th c.BC+]; δεξιά as adverb, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

II. fortunate, especially of the flight of birds and other omens, δ. ὄρνις [Refs 8th c.BC+]. adverb -ῶς[Refs 2nd c.AD+]

III. Astron., northerly, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

IV. metaphorically, dexterous, ready, skilful, clever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]a clever thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]. adverb -ιῶς[Refs 4th c.BC+]in the right spirit, [Refs 1st c.BC+] O.: superlative δεξιώτατα [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δεξιός

dexios

from 1209; the right side or (feminine) hand (as that which usually

takes):--right (hand, side).

see GREEK for 1209

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δεξιός, ά, όν

Adj

on the right hand, right hand, right

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δεξιός dexios 54x

right, as opposed to left, Mt. 5:29, 30; Lk. 6:6; ἡ δεξιά, i.e. χείρ, the right hand, Mt. 6:3; 27:29; τὰ δεξιά, i.e. μέρη, the parts towards the right hand, the right hand side; καθίζειν, or, καθῆσθαι, or, ἑστάναι, ἐκ δεξιῶν [μερῶν] τινος, to sit or stand at the right hand of any one, as a mark of the highest honor and dignity which he can bestow, Mt. 20:20; 26:64; εἶνι ἐκ δεξιῶν [μερῶν] τινος, to be at one’s right hand, as a helper, Acts 2:25; δεξιὰς (χεῖρας) διδόναι, to give the right hand to any one, as a pledge of sincerity in one’s promises, Gal.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δεξιός δέχομαι on the right hand or side, Lat. dexter, opp. to ἀριστερός, Hom., etc.; τὸ δ. (sc. κέρας) the right of an army, Xen.:—adverb. usages, ἐπὶ δεξιά on the right, Il.; ἐπὶ δεξιόφιν (epic gen.) towards the right, id. Il.; πρὸς δεξιά Hdt.

fortunate, boding good, of the flight of birds, δεξιὸς ὄρνις, ῀ αἴσιος, Hom. —This sense came from the Greek augurs looking to the North, so that lucky omens, which came from the East, were on the right, while the unlucky ones from the West were on the left.

metaph. dexterous, ready, opp. to σκαιός (sinister, French gauche); and of the mind, sharp, shrewd, clever, Ar., Thuc., etc.:—adv., δεξιῶς; Sup. δεξιώτατα, Ar.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-GPN — Adjective · genitive · plural · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-GPN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The most efficient member of the body, Mt 5:30, and the ready executor of the behests of the will. Hence its use as a symbol of many of the strongest emotions of the inner man. The right-hand is significant of power, especially the almighty power of God, Ex 15:6 Ps 21:8 77:10; of honor, Ps 45:9 Mt 25:34 Ac 7:55; of special benediction, Ge 48:14; of fraternal love, Ga 2:9; of hostility, Ps 109:6

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
63%right hand
right hand63% · 34×right35% · 19×other renderings2% · 1×

54 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial74%object11%subject7%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 54 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςἐνεἰς
ἐκ
κάθημαιI sit, am seatedεἷςoneκαθίζωI set, make to s
ἐν
καθίζωI set, make to sεἰμίI am, existκαταφρονέωI despise, scorn
εἰμίI am, exist
στῦλοςa pillar
δεξιός[the] right hand54×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godδύναμιςmight, power, maκάθημαιI sit, am seated
ἐγώ
ἕωςuntil, as far asκαίand, even, also,Disj
αὐτός
Article theδεῦτεcome hither, comκαίand, even, also,
καίand, even, also, nam
εἷςoneἀριστερόςon the left hand
σύ
χείρa hand

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδεξιός · 54× in the New Testament
Matthew Revelation Acts Mark Luke Hebrews John 1 Peter 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians Galatians
Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 93 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 122c. AD 40

ἀλλὰ γὰρ καὶ κινήσεις ἑπτὰ εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὴν ἄνω, τὴν κάτω, τὴν ἐπὶ δεξιά, τὴν ἐπ’ εὐώνυμα, τὴν πρόσω, τὴν κατόπιν, τὴν ἐν κύκλῳ, ἃς ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα τρανοῦσιν οἱ τὴν ὄρχησιν ἐπιδεικνύμενοι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.80c. AD 75–95

Ὁ δὲ τῆς δεξιᾶς αὐτοῦ λαβόμενος ὦ νεανία, φησί, σὺ γάρ μοι νῦν ἄριστος καὶ συνίσειν ἱκανώτατος ὑπὸ οἰκέτου τοὐμοῦ μεμαρτύρησαι, τῶν αὐτῶν ἀγαθῶν, ὧν καὶ τούτῳ μετέδωκας ἀξίωσον κἀμὲ φράσας ὅσα μοι κατὰ τοὺς ὕπνους ὀνειράτων ὄψεις προδηλοῦσι·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 11.10c. AD 100

Καὶ ἦν ποταμὸς ἕλκων ἐκ δεξιῶν, καὶ ἀνέβαινεν ἐξ αὐτοῦ δένδρα ὡραῖα: καὶ ὃς ἂν φάγῃ ἐξ αὐτῶν, ζήσεται εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC
P.Athen.. 23Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 82

καθάπερ ἐκ δίκης. ὑπογραφεὺς τῶν ὁμολογούντων Φρόντων Πάπου ὡς ἐτῶν μ οὐλὴ τραχήλῳ ἐκ δεξιῶν Δῖος καὶ Ὦσις καὶ Ἡρακλῆς οἱ τρεῖς Ἡρακλέους Πέρσαι τῆς ἐπιγονῆς ἀλλήλων ἔγγυοι εἰς

P.Alex. 7Dionysias (Arsinoites)AD 113

ἐνγύοις μετὰ κυρίου τῆς Δημητροῦτος … … ειδωνος ὡς ἐτῶν εἴκοσι πέντε οὐλὴ χειρὶ δεξιᾷ εἰς ἔκτισιν ἀργυρίου ἐπισήμου νομίσματος κεφαλαίου δραχμὰς ἕκατον εἴκοσι τέσσαρας ἃς καὶ εἴληφαν παρʼ

P.Amh. 2 112Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 128

μετώπῳ ἐξ ἀριστερῶν τοῦ δὲ ἄλλου Πανεφρίμις Στοτοήτεως ὡς ἐτῶν … οὐλὴ … ψι δεξιᾷ … … … Πακῦσις Στοτοήτεως ὁμολογῶ ἀπέχειν παρὰ σοῦ ἀδελφοῦ Πανεφρίμιος τὰς προκιμένας ἀργυρίου

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
αὐτοῦ·autos of Him; G846 Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-GSM — Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-GSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςof Him;5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
δεῦτεdeute Come G1205 Verb · present · active · imperative · second person · plural
12× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Come means to move towards the speaker, as Jesus says in Matthew 11:28. It is an invitation to follow him. The word is used to urge someone to come near or to follow.
Amplified meaning
draw near, approach
Tyndale gloss
come
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word δεῦτε (deute) is an adverb meaning 'come hither' or 'come here,' functioning as a plural imperative. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, often used to invite or exhort others, such as in Matthew 11:28 and John 21:12. The word is derived from δεῦρο and is primarily used in the Septuagint and later Greek literature.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δεῦτε

adv., as pl. of δεῦρο, 1. (b), q.v.,

[in LXX chiefly for לְכוּ ;]

come on! come here! come!: c. imperat., Mt 25:34 28:6, Jo 4:29 21:12, Re 19:17; c. subjc., Mt 21:38, Mk 12:7; seq. ὀπίσω, Mt 4:19, Mk 1:17; πρός, Mt 11:28; εἰς, Mt 22:4, Mk 6:31.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δεῦτε, adv., used when two or more are addressed [cf. B. 70 (61)]; perhaps fr. δεῦρ᾽ ire [yet see Bitm. Gram. 2116 Aufl. § 115 Anm. 8], see δεῦρο, 1; 1. fr. Hom. down, come hither, come here, come: foll. by an impyv., δεῦτε, κληρονομήσατε, Mt. xxv. 34; δεῦτε, ἴδετε, Mt. xxviii. 6; Jn. iv. 29; δεῦτε, ἀριστήσατε, Jn. xxi. 12; δεῦτε, συνάχθητε (Ree. 8. καὶ συνάγεσθε), Rev. xix. 17. δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου come after me, be my disciples: Mt. iv. 19; Mk. i. 17, (equiv. to ΠΝ 399, 2 K. vi. 19) ; δεῦτε εἰς τ. γάμους. Mt. xxii. 4; εἰς ἔρημον τόπον, Mk. vi. 31; δεῦτε πρός pe, Mt. xi. 28. 2. It gets the force of an interjection, come ! come now! foll. by a hortat. subj.: δεῦτε, ἀποκτείνωμεν, Mt. xxi. 38; Mk. xii. 7 and RG in Lk. xx. 14. (Sept. mostly for 337, sometimes for…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δεῦτε (deute) — come.

δεῦτε,

adverb, as plural of δεῦρο, come hither! in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+]: in later Prose, δ. οἰκοδομήσωμεν [LXX+NT+1st c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

δεῦτε

deute

from 1204 and an imperative form of eimi (to go); come hither!:--come,

X follow.

see GREEK for 1204

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δεῦτε

v.

come hither, come, hither

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δεῦτε deute 12x

come, Mt. 4:19; 11:28; as a particle of exhortation, incitement, etc., and followed by an imperative, come now, etc., Mt. 21:38; 28:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δεῦτε as pl. of δεῦρο, hither! come on! come here! just like δεῦρο, with pl. imperat., δεῦτ᾽ ἄγετ᾽ Il.; δεῦτε φίλοι id. Il.; δεῦτ᾽ ἄγε, Φαιήκων ἡγήτορες Od.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAM-2P — Verb · present · active · imperative · second person · plural
present active imperative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAM-2P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: iMperative Person: second Number: Plural

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

kum: The translation of many Hebrew and Greek words. In the phrase "The Spirit of Yahweh came mightily upon him" (Jud 14:6,19; 15:14; 1Sa 10:10; 11:6; 16:13), the word is tsaleah; Jud 14:6; 15:14 "came mightily," which is the uniform translation of the Revised Version (British and American) (compare Jud 13:25 "to move," i.e. to disturb or stir up). In Jud 6:34; 1Ch 12:18; 2Ch 24:20, it is labhesh, "to clothe"; the Revised Version, margin "The Spirit .... clothed itself with Gideon" and .... "with Zechariah,"…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%come
come100% · 13×

13 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 12 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδεξιόςon the right han
κληρονόμοςan heir, inheritor
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesus
Article the
ἕτοιμοςready, prepared
πᾶςall, the whole,
λέγωI say, speak
καθώςjust as, as
δεῦτεCome12×
what comes after →
ὀπίσωbehind, after
ἐγώ
ἀποκτείνωI put to death, kill
αὐτός
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
πρός
ἐγώ
εἰς
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδεῦτε · 12× in the New Testament
Matthew Mark John Revelation
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 23 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Confusion of Tongues 1c. AD 40

δεῦτε πλινθεύσωμεν πλίνθους καὶ ὀπτήσωμεν αὐτὰς πυρί.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 6.111c. AD 75–95

προσιόντων δὲ αὐτῶν τῷ στρατοπέδῳ τῶν πολεμίων ὑποφαινούσης ἤδη τῆς ἡμέρας ἰδόντες οἱ Παλαιστῖνοι πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἔλεγον ἐκ τῶν ὑπονόμων καὶ σπηλαίων προϊέναι τοὺς Ἑβραίους, καὶ πρὸς Ἰωνάθην καὶ τὸν ὁπλοφόρον αὐτοῦ δεῦτε, ἔφασαν, ἀνέλθετε πρὸς ἡμᾶς,…

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 22.1c. AD 96

Ταῦτα δὲ πάντα βεβαιοῖ ἡ ἐν Χριστῷ πίστις: καὶ γὰρ αὐτὸς διὰ τοῦ πνεύματος τοῦ ἁγίου οὕτως προσκαλεῖται ἡμᾶς: Δεῦτε, τέκνα, ἀκούσατέ μου, φόβον κυρίου διδάξω ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Hamb. 4 254AD 101–AD 125

γράφειν μοι περὶ ὧν ὑμῖν ἐστιν … … … … … … … … δευτε

λογχία μου. φέρε καὶ τὰ τοῦ παπυλίωνος σκεύη. ἐὰν εὕρητε εὐκαιρίαν, μετὰ ἀνθρώπων καλῶν δεῦτε. ἐρχέσθω μεθʼ ὑμῶν Νόννος. ἔνεγκον ἡμῶν πάντα τὰ ἱμάτια ἐρχομένη. ἔνεγκον ἐρχομένη σου τὰ

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
οἱho you who [are] G3588 Article · nominative · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NPM — Article · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
you who [are]19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
εὐλογημένοιeulogeō blessed G2127 Verb · perfect · passive · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
42× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To praise or bless someone means to speak well of them, like in Luke 1:64 where Zechariah praises God. It's about thanking or invoking a blessing on someone.
Amplified meaning
highly favored, praised
Tyndale gloss
to praise/bless
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word εὐλογέω (i.e., eulogeo) means to speak well of or to bless. It encompasses both praising and invoking blessings, often in a religious context. The New Testament uses it in various forms, such as in Luke 1:64 and Ephesians 1:3. Some sources note its passive form, indicating being blessed, as seen in Luke 1:28.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εὐλογέω, -ῶ

[in LXX chiefly for בָּרַךְ pi. ;]

to speak well of, praise (cl.; LXX De 8:10, al.): τ. θεόν, Lk 1:64 2:28 24:51, 53 (αἰνοῦντες, T, WH, mg.), Ja 3:9; absol., to give praise, Mt 14:19 26:26 (v. Swete on Mk 14:22), Mk 6:41 14:22 (v. Swete, in l.), Lk 24:30, I Co 14:16.

As in LXX (= בָּרַךְ pi.);

to bless, invoke blessings on (Ge 24:60, Nu 23:20, al.): absol.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εὐλογέω. We can illustrate this verb only from the Christian papyri, as P Amh II. 145} (iv/v A.D.) τῷ ἀγ]απητῷ ἀδελφῷ καὶ ηὐλ[ο]γημένῳ, and the late P Grenf 11. 113? (viii/ix A.D.) τῶν εὐλογημένων τριῶν συνόδων, 11 μετὰ τῶν σὺν αὐτοῖς kal εὐλογημένων ὁμονόων. It occurs, however, in inserr. in such a formula as OG/S 73 εὐλογεῖ τὸν θεὸν Πτολεμαῖος Διονυσίου ᾿Ιουδαῖος, and was by no means confined to the Jews as Dittenberger shows from C/G 4705 4? (of Pan) €[¥]Aoy[a] τὸν εὔο[δο]ν θεόν, 2d. 4705 εἶ εὐλογῶ [τ]ὴν Hiow. See also Syd 8g1*4 (ii/A.b.) where the prayer is uttered that a protector of a tomb—ta@v λῴων ἀπολαύοι εὐλογοῖτό τε ἐν παντὶ δήμῳ, and the exx. of the verb in votive inscriptions given by Ramsay Zxf7 x. p. 54, as when a person who has been chastised for his sin by the god dedicates a stele—e(¥)Aoyav σου τὰς δυνάμί(ε)ις : he adds that the stele which is dedicated is in one case…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εὐλογέω (eulogeō) — to praise/bless.

εὐλογ-έω,

imperfect εὐλόγουν or ηὐλ- [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future -ήσω [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist εὐλόγησα or ηὐλ[LXX]: infinitive εὐλογῆσαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect εὐλόγηκα [LXX]passive, with future middle εὐλογήσομαι (variant -ηθήσομαι, as always in [LXX+5th c.BC+]: aorist εὐλογήθην [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: perfect εὐλόγημαι [LXX]:—speak well of, praise, πόλιν [Refs 5th c.BC+], Isoc.[same places]; deliver a panegyric upon, [Refs 4th c.BC+]: with neuter adjective, εὐ. καὶ δίκαια κἄδικα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θεοὶ εὐλογοῦσί τινα honour him, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, ἐπαίνοις εὐλογούμενον πέδον [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εὐλογέω

eulogeo

from a compound of 2095 and 3056; to speak well of, i.e. (religiously)

to bless (thank or invoke a benediction upon, prosper):--bless,

praise.

see GREEK for 2095

see GREEK for 3056

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εὐλογέω

v.

I bless

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εὐλογέω eulogeō 41x

pr. to speak well of, in NT to bless, ascribe praise and glorification, Lk. 1:64; to bless, invoke a blessing upon, Mt. 5:44; to bless, confer a favor or blessing upon, Eph. 1:3; Heb. 6:14; pass. to be blessed, to be an object of favor or blessing, Lk. 1:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εὐλογέω εὐλογέω, to speak well of, praise, honour, Trag.; δίκαια εὐλ. τινα to praise him justly, Ar.:—Pass. to be honoured, Soph.

to bless, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-RPP-NPM — Verb · perfect · passive · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-RPP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: peRfect Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

bles'-ed (barukh): Where God is referred to, this word has the sense of "praise," as in 1Sa 25:32, "Blessed be Yahweh, the God of Israel." But where man is in mind it is used in the sense of "happy" or "favored," and most frequently so in the Psalms and the Gospels, as for example, "Blessed is the man that walketh not in the counsel of the wicked" (Ps 1:1); "Blessed art thou among women" (Lu 1:42); "Blessed are the poor in spirit" (Mt 5:3).

See BEATITUDES.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
40%blessed
blessed40% · 17×blessing14% · 6×do bless9% · 4×having blessed9% · 4×he blessed9% · 4×we bless7% · 3×you shall bless2% · 1×i will bless2% · 1×other renderings7% · 3×

43 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb74%predicate21%adverbial5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 42 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, fὀλίγος& Advγυνήa woman, wife, m
λέγωI say, speak
ἄνDisjκαίand, even, also,ὅτεwhen
αὐτός
ἐναγκαλίζομαιI take in my armχείρa handἀποστέλλωI send forth, se
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaven
Article the
Article the
δεῦτεcome hither, comἐνΧριστόςanointed, the Me
εὐλογέωblessed42×
what comes after →
Article the
ἔρχομαιI come, goθεόςGod, a godπατήρfather, Father,
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakΣυμεώνPropκαίand, even, also,
καίand, even, also, nam
κλάωI breakκατακλάωI break in pieceμήNeg
σύ
ἐνκαίand, even, also,
κλάωI break
καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεὐλογέω · 42× in the New Testament
Luke Hebrews Mark Matthew 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Peter Acts Ephesians Galatians James John
Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 174 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.17c. AD 40

„Καὶ εὐλόγησεν ὁ θεὸς τὴν ἡμέραν τὴν ἑβδόμην καὶ ἡγίασεν αὐτήν“ (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.181c. AD 75–95

ἐχορήγησε δὲ οὗτος ὁ Μελχισεδὲκ τῷ Ἁβράμου στρατῷ ξένια καὶ πολλὴν ἀφθονίαν τῶν ἐπιτηδείων παρέσχε καὶ παρὰ τὴν εὐωχίαν αὐτόν τε ἐπαινεῖν ἤρξατο καὶ τὸν θεὸν εὐλογεῖν ὑποχειρίους αὐτῷ ποιήσαντα τοὺς ἐχθρούς.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 13.4c. AD 100

καὶ ἐν ἄλλῃ προφητείᾳ λέγει φανερώτερον ὁ Ἰακὼβ πρὸς Ἰωσὴφ τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ, λέγων: Ἰδού, οὐκ ἐστέρησέν με κύριος τοῦ προσώπου σου: προσάγαγέ μοι τοὺς υἱούς σου, ἵνα εὐλογήσω αὐτούς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 8th c. AD
P.Diosk. 6Herakleopolites147 BC

οὗ τὸ ὄνομα ἀγνοοῦμεν ἐνέσεισεν τῶι ἑνὶ ἡμῶν Ἀρτεμιδώρωι ἐπίτηδες, ὡς ἔστιν ἐκ τῶν εὐλόγων θεωρῆσαι, τοῦ γὰρ Ἀρτεμιδώρου ἐπιτιμήσαντος αὐτῶι καὶ γενηθέντων ἡμῶν ἐντὸς τῆς πύλης τοῦ ὀχυρώματος

Stud.Pal. 5 6HermopolisAD 266–AD 268

τὴν δέησιν ποιούμεθα ἐν μὲν δὴ … θειότατε αὐτοκράτωρ εισου δο … ει τῶν εὐλόγων εἶναι· τὸ γάρτοι ἔθνος τὸ ἡμέτερον ἐπιτηρῆσαν ἑκάστοτε τὴν τοῦ Νείλου φοράν τε καὶ

P.Herm. 5Hermopolis (?)AD 317–AD 323

εὐφραίνων ἐμαυτὸν γράφω σοι καὶ εὔχομαι ὑγιαίνοντί σοι καὶ εὐθυμοῦντι δοθῆναι τὰ γράμματα. τῶν εὐλόγων δέ ἐστι καί σε γράφοντα τοῖς ἄλλοις μιμνήσκεσθαι καὶ ἡμῶν, ἵνα μείζονα ἔχωμεν τὴν

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
τοῦho of the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
of the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
πατρόςpatēr Father G3962 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
413× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A father is a male parent, like Joseph, the father of Jesus, as mentioned in Matthew 2:22 and Luke 1:17. It can also refer to a forefather or ancestor, like Abraham, as seen in Matthew 3:9 and John 8:39.
Amplified meaning
eternal Parent, heavenly Dad
Tyndale gloss
father
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πατήρ (patēr) means 'father' and can refer to a male parent, an ancestor, or even a metaphorical originator. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often in relation to God as the Father of believers, as well as in the context of respect for elders or teachers. The term can also denote a broader familial or ancestral connection, as seen in references to forefathers.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πατήρ, πατρός, -τρί, τέρα,

[in LXX chiefly and very freq. for אָב;]

a father;

prop.,

of the male parent: Mt 2:22, Lk 1:17, Jo 4:53; anarth., He 12:7 (M, Pr., 82 f.); pl., of both parents (cl.), He 11:23; οἱ π. τ. σαρκός, He 12:9;

of a forefather or ancestor (in cl. usually in pl.; Hom., al.): Mt 3:9, Lk 1:73, Jo 8:39, al.; pl., Mt 23:30, 32, Lk 6:23, 26, Jo 4:20,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πατήρ [fr. τ. pa; lit. nourisher, protector, upholder ; (Curtius § 348)], πατρός, -rpl, -τέρα, voc. πάτερ [for which the nom. 6 πατήρ is five times used, and (anarthrous) πατήρ in Jn. xvii. 21 T Tr WH, 24 and 25 LT Tr WH; ef. B. § 129,5; W.§ 29,2; WH. App. p. 158], plur. πατέρες, πατέρων, πατράσι (Heb. i.1), πατέρας, 6,[fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 38, a father; 1. prop., i. q. generator or male ancestor, and either a. the nearest ancestor: Mt. ii. 22; iv. 21 sq.; viii. 21; Lk.i.17; Jn. iv.53; Acts vii. 143 1 Co. v. 1, etc.; of πατέρες τῆς σαρκός, fathers of the corporeal nature, natural fathers, (opp. to ὁ πατὴρ τῶν πνευμάτων), Heb. xii. 9; plur. of both parents, Heb. xi. 23 (not infreq. in prof. auth., ef. Delitzsch ad loc.); or Ὄ. a more remote ancestor, the founder of α race or tribe, progenitor of a people, forefather: 80 Abraham is called, Mt. iii. 9; Lk. i. 73; xvi. 24; Jn. viii.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πατήρ. For the looser use οἵ πατήρ as a title or respect or honour, see P Oxy X. 1296 (iii/A.D.), where the writer

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πατήρ (patēr) — father.

πᾰτήρ, ὁ,

genitive and dative πατέρος, πατέρι in Epic dialect and Lyric poetry, Attic dialect πατρός, πατρί (which is also the commoner form in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; accusative always πατέρ; vocative πάτερ: plural πατέρες, πατέρας, πατέρων (πατρῶν only [Refs 8th c.BC+]; dative πατράσι [ᾰ] (cf. Sanskrit locative plural pitṛ[snull]u, no dative plural occurs in [Refs 8th c.BC+], late Epic dialect πατέρεσσι [Refs 4th c.AD+]:— father, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πατρὸς πατήρ grandfather,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὰ πρὸς πατρός by the father's side, [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc.; especially of God, the father of the Israelites, [LXX]; father of men, [NT]; father of Jesus Christ, [Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πατήρ

pater

apparently a primary word; a "father" (literally or figuratively, near

or more remote):--father, parent.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πατήρ, πατρός, ὁ

n.m.

father, Father, ancestor

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πατήρ acc. always πατέρα gen. pl. rarely πατρῶν a father, Hom., etc.; πατρὸς πατήρ a grandfather, Il.; τὰ πρὸς πατρός ῀ πατρόθεν, by the father's side, Hdt.

among the gods Zeus is called πατήρ, πατὴρ Ζεύς, π. ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Hom., Hes.; so Ζεὺς π. Aesch.; Ζεῦ πάτερ καὶ θεοί Ar.

a respectful mode of addressing elderly persons, Od.

metaph. the father of anything, Lat. auctor, π. ἀοιδᾶν Pind., etc.

in pl. fathers, i.e. forefathers, Hom.; ἐξ ἔτι πατρῶν as an inheritance from one's fathers, Od.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

fa'-ther (Anglo-Saxon, Foeder; German, Vater; Hebrew 'abh, etymology uncertain, found in many cognate languages; Greek pater, from root pa, "nourisher," "protector," "upholder"):

1. Immediate Male Ancestor:

Immediate male ancestor. The father in the Hebrew family, as in the Roman, had supreme rights over his children, could dispose of his daughter in marriage (Ge 29), arrange his son's marriage (Ge 24), sell his children (Ex 21:7), but not his daughter to a stranger (Ne 5:5), had power of life and death, as in the case of Isaac (Ge 22), Jephthah's daughter (Jud 11:34), the sacrificing of his children to Molech (Le 18:21; 20:3-5), etc. Respect, reverence and affection for…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Father

A name applied (1) to any ancestor (Deut. 1:11; 1 Kings 15:11; Matt. 3:9; 23:30, etc.); and (2) as a title of respect to a chief, ruler, or elder, etc. (Judg. 17:10; 18:19; 1 Sam. 10:12; 2 Kings 2:12; Matt. 23:9, etc.). (3) The author or beginner of anything is also so called; e.g., Jabal and Jubal (Gen. 4:20, 21; comp. Job 38:28).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The position and authority of the father as the head of the family are expressly assumed and sanctioned in Scripture, as a likeness of that of the Almighty over his creatures. It lies of course at the root of that so-called patriarchal government, (Genesis 3:16; 1 Corinthians 11:3) which was introductory to the more definite systems which followed, and which in part, but not wholly, superseded it. The father’s blessing was regarded as conferring special benefit, but his malediction special injury, on those on whom it fell, (Genesis 9:25,27; 27:27-40; 48:15,20; 49:1) ... and so also the sin of a parent was held to affect, in certain cases, the welfare of his descendants. (2 Kings…

Is often synonymous with ancestor, founder, or originator, as Ge 4:20-21 Joh 8:56 Ro 4:16. Joseph was a father to Pharoah, Ge 45:8, as his counselor and provider. God is the FATHER of men, as their Creator, De 32:6 Isa 63:16 64:8 Lu 3:38. But as we have forfeited the rights of children by our sins, it is only through Christ that we can call God by that endearing name, "our Father," Joh 20:17 Ro 8:15-17.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
86%father
father86% · 359×fathers12% · 51×other renderings2% · 9×

419 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject32%adverbial26%object21%predicate7%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 413 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,πρόςἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
θεόςGod, a godθάνατοςdeathἀδελφόςa brother
θεόςGod, a god
ἀπόArticle theἐν
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,προσεύχομαιI pray, pray forἸησοῦςJesus
σύ
ἐξομολογέωI consent fully,γράφωI writeπροσεύχομαιI pray, pray for
πατήρFather413×
what comes after →
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,Article theἐν
σύ
Article theκαίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theκύριοςlord, Lord, mastΧριστόςanointed, the Me
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,Article theμετά
Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastπαιδίονa little child, πέμπωI send

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπατήρ · 413× in the New Testament
John Matthew Luke Acts Mark Romans 1 John Ephesians Hebrews 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 615 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 7c. AD 40

Τινὲς γὰρ τὸν κόσμον μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν κοσμοποιὸν θαυμάσαντες τὸν μὲν ἀγένητόν τε καὶ ἀίδιον ἀπεφήναντο, τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ πολλὴν ἀπραξίαν ἀνάγνως κατεψεύσαντο, δέον ἔμπαλιν τοῦ μὲν τὰς δυνάμεις ὡς ποιητοῦ καὶ πατρὸς καταπλαγῆναι, τὸν δὲ μὴ πλέον ἀποσεμνῦναι…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.20c. AD 75–95

οὔτε γὰρ αὐτῷ ποτʼ ἂν γενέσθαι νοῦν ἀγαθὸν τῷ νομοθέτῃ ταύτης ἀπολειπομένῳ τῆς θέας, οὔτε τῶν γραφησομένων εἰς ἀρετῆς λόγον οὐδὲν ἀποβήσεσθαι τοῖς λαβοῦσιν, εἰ μὴ πρὸ παντὸς ἄλλου διδαχθεῖεν, ὅτι πάντων πατήρ τε καὶ δεσπότης ὁ θεὸς ὢν καὶ πάντα…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.7c. AD 100

λέγει δὲ πάλιν πρὸς αὐτούς: Μὴ ἐγὼ ἐνετειλάμην τοῖς πατράσιν ὑμῶν ἐκπορευομένοις ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, προσενέγκαι μοι ὁλοκαυτώματα καὶ θυσίας;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 31Pathyris105 BC

τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῷ μέρος δανείου οὗ ἔθετο Πατοῦς Ὥρου ὁ τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ Ταρεήσιος πατὴρ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἀρχείου χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς Ε καὶ τοὺς τούτων τόκους· ὃς

P.Grenf. 2 26Pathyris104 BC

Φαγώνι, τοῖς δ τοῦ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Ταρεήσιος τῆς Πατοῦτος τῆς Παοῦτος μητρὸς τοῦ προγεγραμμένου πατρὸς Ὥρου, ἀπέχειν καὶ μὴ ἐπικαλεῖν περὶ ὀφειλήματος συναλλαγμάτων Αἰγυπτίων καὶ Ἑλληνικῶν ἃ ἐξέτεισε Παοῦς

P.Adl. 20Poinkoris (Diopolites)99 BC

Ψενμεγχείους ὡς ἐτῶν λε μέσου … πάντες τῶν ἐκ τοῦ Παθυρίτου τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν τῶι πατρὶ τοῦ Ὥρου γῆν ἀρουρῶν … ἐν τῶι ἄνω πεδίωι Κροκοδίλων πόλεως ἀπὸ σφραγῖδος μιᾶς

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
μου,egō of mine, G3165 Personal pronoun · first person · genitive · singular
1,872× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Tyndale gloss
I/we
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐγώ, gen, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς,

pers. pron.

I.

The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mt 3:11, Mk 1:8, Lk 3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mt 10:16, Jo 10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. I Ki 3:8), Ac 9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jo 1:23 (LXX), Ac 7:32 (LXX).

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐγώ, gen. ἐμοῦ, enclitic pod; dat. ἐμοί, enclitic μοί; acc. ἐμέ, enclitic μέ; plur. ἡμεῖς, ete.; personal pronoun, J. 1. The nominatives ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, when joined to a verb, generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis, as Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (ἐγὼ pev... ὁ δέ); Mt. iii. 14 (ἐγὼ... ἔχω, καὶ σύν ; V. 22, 28, 39, and often; ἡμεῖς, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ἡμεῖς x. of Φαρισαῖοι, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them, as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; οἵ. B. §129, 12. ἰδοὺ ἐγώ, 1397, behold me, hereamT: Acts ix.10 (1S. iii. 8). ἐγώ, like 38, Jam: Jn. i. 23; Acts vii. 32, [ef. W.585 (544); B. 125 (109)]. 2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace. are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with prepositions: ἔμπροσθέν pov, Jn. i. 15; ὀπίσω…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐγώ. Deissmann (ZAZ p. 134 ff.) has drawn attention to the parallels to the solemn use of the first personal pronoun in the Fourth Gospel that may be adduced from inscriptions and magical texts. Thus in an inscr. in honour of Isis from Ios, written in ii/iii A.p., the contents of which are preChristian, we find —Elows ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ τ[ύρανν]ος πάσης χόρας.. ἐγὼ νόμους ἀνθρώποις ἐθέμην . . ἐγώ εἰμι Kpdvov θυγάτηρ πρεσβυτάτη α΄. And similarly in the magical papyrus P Lond 4645 (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 69) ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ἀκέφαλος δαίμων . . ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἀλήθεια ὁ μεισῶν ἀδικήματα γείνεσθαι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ α΄. With the construction of the phrase τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ; in Jn 24 we may compare BGU IV. 1141°8 (n.c. 14) ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ διαστολὰς μηδὲν αὐτῶι καὶ ἐκείνωι εἶναι : for its meaning see Ε΄. C. Burkitt in 77:5 xiii. p- 594f., where it is rendered, ‘‘ What have I and thou to do with that ?” On the difficult…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μέ (me) — me.

ἐγώ,

I: pronoun of the first person:—Epic dialect mostly ἐγών before vowels (so in Doric dialect, before consonants, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἱών [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:— strengthened ἔγωγε, I at least, for my part, indeed, for myself (more frequently in Attic dialect than in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Doric dialect ἐγώνγα [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Boeotian dialect ἱώνγα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἱώνει [Refs]; ἰώγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Laconian dialect and Tarentum dialect ἐγώνη, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. oblique cases from a different root, genitive ἐμοῦ, enclitic μο; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μευ, also ἐμέθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἔμεθεν [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἐμέος, ἐμεῦς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἐμοῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+] — _dative_ ἐμοί, enclitic μοι (which may be compared with Sanskrit…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐγώ

me

a shorter (and probably originally) from of 1691; me:--I, me, my.

see GREEK for 1691

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐγώ egō 2x

I, gen., ἐμοῦ [μου], dat., ἐμοί [μοι], acc., ἐμέ [με]

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-1GS — Personal pronoun · first person · genitive · singular
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-1GS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: first Case: Genitive Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Mine

The process of mining is described in Job 28:1-11. Moses speaks of the mineral wealth of Palestine (Deut. 8:9). Job 28:4 is rightly thus rendered in the Revised Version, “He breaketh open a shaft away from where men sojourn; they are forgotten of the foot [that passeth by]; they hang afar from men, they swing to and fro.” These words illustrate ancient mining operations.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
35%us
us35% · 717×me32% · 644×mine20% · 402×we ourselves6% · 124×my2% · 45×other renderings5% · 97×

2,029 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 27 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
κληρονομήσατεklēronomeō do inherit G2816 Verb · aorist · active · imperative · second person · plural
18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To inherit means to receive something as a gift or legacy, like in Galatians 4:30 where it talks about receiving an inheritance. This word is used to describe receiving a possession or a kingdom.
Amplified meaning
receive as a gift, possess
Tyndale gloss
to inherit
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κληρονομέω is built from the root for 'heir' and means to inherit or receive by lot. It covers the act of obtaining inheritance, particularly in a biblical context, where it often refers to spiritual blessings and the Messianic Kingdom. The New Testament uses it in verses like Matthew 5:5 and Galatians 4:30. Some lexicons note its use with both genitive and accusative constructions.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κληρονομέω, -ῶ

(< κληρονόμος),

[in LXX chiefly for ירשׁ, also for נחל, etc.;]

to receive by lot.

to inherit (in cl., usually c. gen. rei): absol., Ga 4:30(LXX); in general, to possess oneself of, receive as one's own, obtain (as De 4:5, al., cf. Ps 24 (25):3, Is 61:7): c. acc. rei (as generally in late Gk., v. M, Pr., 65), of the Messianic Kingdom (cf. Ps 36 (37):11, Si 4:13 37:26, and v. Dalman, Words, 125 ff.) and its blessings and privileges, τ. γῆν, Mt 5:5(cf. LXX); τ. βασιλείαν, β. θεοῦ, Mt 25:34, I Co 6:9, 10 15:50,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κληρονομέω, -@; fut. κληρονομήσω; 1 aor. ἐκληρονόμησα; pf. κεκληρονόμηκα; (κληρονόμος, q. V-; Cf. οἰκονόμος) ; Sept. for on3 and much oftener for w7; 1. to receive a lot, receive by lot; esp. to receive a part of an inheritance, receive as an inheritance, obtain by right of inheritance; 80, particularly in the Attic orators, w. a gen. of the thing; in later writ. not infreq. w. an ace. of the thing (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 129; Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 140; W 200 (188); [B. § 132,8]); absol. to be an heir, to inherit Gal. iv. 30 fr. Gen. xxi. 10. 2. univ, to receive the portion assigned to one, receive an allotted portion, receive as one’s own or as a possession; to become partaker of, to obtain [cf. Eng. “inherit”], (as φήμην, Polyb. 18, 38 (55), 8; τὴν ἐπ᾽ εὐσεβείᾳ δόξαν, 15, 22, 3); in bibl. Grk. everywh. w. the acc. of the thing; so very freq. in the O. T. in the phrase κληρ.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κληρονομέω. For this verb in the original sense of ‘‘inherit’’ we may cite BGU I. 194-1 (a petition—a.p. 135) τὰ μαμμῴα (not in LS) κληρονομεῖν, ‘ to inherit her grandmother’s belongings,” P Ryl If. 11718 (A.D. 269) τοὺς μηδὲν [τ]ῶν κατοιχομένων κεκληρονομηκότας μὴ κατέχεσθαι τοῖς ἐκείνων ὀφε[ιλήμασt]v ἢ καὶ ζητήμασιν σαφῶς τοῖς θείοις νόμοις διώρισται, ‘it is clearly stated in the Imperial laws that those who have inherited nothing from deceased persons cannot be held responsible for their debts or the claims made against them ”’ (Edd.), BGU IV. 1o24¥#- 16 (end of iv/a.p.) κληρονομήσι (Z-cer) δέκατον μέρος τῶν ὑπαρχόντων Διοδήμῳ. In all these cases the verb is construed with the acc. of the thing as generally in later writers and in the NT (cf. Schmidt /os. p- 374f.). For the acc. of a person (cf. LXX Prov 1372) see P Oxy VII. 10678 (iii/A.D.) μάθε οὖν ὅτι ἀλλοτρίαν γυναῖκαν (Δ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κληρονομέω (klēronomeō) — to inherit.

κληρονομ-έω,

inherit, with genitive of things, ὥσπερ τῆς οὐσίας, οὕτω καὶ τῆς φιλίας τῆς πατρικῆς κ. [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc.: absolutely, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

2. acquire, obtain, τὴν ἐπ᾽ ἀσεβείᾳ δόξαν [LXX+2nd c.BC+]; τὴν γῆν receive possession of the promised land, Palestine,[LXX] (also, obtain all that God has promised,[LXX+NT]; obtain salvation, ζωὴν αἰώνιον [NT]

II. to be an inheritor or heir, τινος of a person, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: more frequently τινα, [LXX+2nd c.BC+]:—passive, to be succeeded in the inheritance, of parents, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

III. leave an heir behind one, υἱοὺς υἱῶν [LXX]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

κληρονομέω

kleronomeo

from 2818; to be an heir to (literally or figuratively):--be heir,

(obtain by) inherit(-ance).

see GREEK for 2818

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κληρονομέω

v.

I inherit, obtain

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κληρονομέω klēronomeō 18x

pr. to acquire by lot; to inherit, obtain by inheritance; in NT to obtain, acquire, receive possession of, Mt. 5:5; 19:29; absol. to be heir, Gal. 4:30

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κληρονομέω κληρονομέω, φυτ. -ήσω κληρονόμος to receive a share of an inheritance, to inherit a portion of property, c. gen., Dem.:—also c. acc. rei, to inherit, Luc.

to be an inheritor or heir, τινός of a person, id. Luc.: also c. acc. to succeed one, Plut., Anth.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAM-2P — Verb · aorist · active · imperative · second person · plural
aorist active imperative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAM-2P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iMperative Person: second Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%will inherit
will inherit28% · 5×inherit17% · 3×will i inherit?11% · 2×will inherit?6% · 1×does inherit6% · 1×he has inherited6% · 1×inheriting6% · 1×you may inherit6% · 1×other renderings17% · 3×

18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αἰώνιοςeternal, unending
ζωήlife
αὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, becπαρά
οὐNeg
βασιλείαkingship, sovereθεόςGod, a god
θεόςGod, a god
βασιλείαkingship, sovere
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father,
κληρονομέωdo inherit18×
what comes after →
Article the
γῆthe earth, soil,ἑτοιμάζωI make ready, prυἱόςa son, descenden
μήNeg
πλανάωI lead astray, d
οὐNeg
δύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὄνομαname, character, rep
σωτηρίαdeliverance, salvati

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκληρονομέω · 18× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Hebrews Matthew Galatians Luke 1 Peter Mark Revelation
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 93 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch Josephus Polycarp
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Sacrifices of Abel and Cain 57c. AD 40

„οὐχὶ διὰ τὴν δικαιοσύνην σου οὐδὲ διὰ τὴν ὁσιότητα τῆς καρδίας σου εἰσπορεύῃ τὴν γῆν κληρονομῆσαι αὐτήν, ἀλλὰ“ πρῶτον μὲν „διὰ τὴν ἀνομίαν τῶν ἐθνῶν τούτων“, ὄλεθρον κακίαις ἐπάγοντος θεοῦ, ἔπειθ’ „ἵνα στήσῃ τὴν διαθήκην, ἣν ὤμοσε τοῖς πατράσιν…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 8.359c. AD 75–95

καὶ Νάβωθος μέν, ὡς ἔγραψεν ἡ βασίλισσα, οὕτως καταμαρτυρηθεὶς βλασφημῆσαι τὸν θεόν τε καὶ Ἄχαβον βαλλόμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ πλήθους ἀπέθανεν, ἀκούσασα δὲ ταῦτα Ἰεζάβηλα εἴσεισι πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα καὶ κληρονομεῖν τὸν Ναβώθου ἀμπελῶνα προῖκα ἐκέλευσεν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 13.1c. AD 100

Ἴδωμεν δὲ εἰ οὗτος ὁ λαὸς κληρονομεῖ ἡ ὁ πρῶτος, καὶ εἰ ἡ διαθήκη εἰς ἡμᾶς ἢ εἰς ἐκείνους.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. BC 2nd c. AD
P.Oxy. 42 3014OxyrhynchosAD 1–AD 100

1 τοὺς στρατευομένους καὶ ἀδιαθέτους τελευτῶντας ἐξὸν τέκνοις καὶ συγγενέσιν κληρονομεῖν ὅταν τοῦ αὐτοῦ γένους ὦσιν οἱ μετερχόμενοι. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ

SB 10 10752AD 76–AD 100

ειλαμένη γὰρ … … … ἀπὸ κώμης Ψαμήρεως ἀρουρῶν ὀκτὼ … … … κληρονομεῖν ὡς ἐὰν αἵρηται α … οδει … … … γὰρ εἰς … … παραχωρησι

P. Murabba'ât 2 116MurabaatAD 101–AD 200

πρὸ τοῦ Αὐρηλίου … τὸν βίον μεταλλάξει υἱοὺς οὓς ἂν ἕξει ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ … κληρονομήσουσιν τὴν φερνὴν καὶ τὰ προγεγραμμένα … αρ … … ων

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
τὴνho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASF — Article · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
ἡτοιμασμένηνhetoimazō prepared G2090 Verb · perfect · passive · participle · accusative · singular · feminine
41× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To make ready means to prepare something or someone, as seen in Mark 14:15 and Luke 9:52. It is about getting things ready for a specific purpose or event.
Amplified meaning
made ready, established
Tyndale gloss
to make ready
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἑτοιμάζω (hetoimazō) means to prepare or make ready. It is derived from the root ἕτοιμος and is used in various contexts, including hospitality and divine preparation for events. In the New Testament, it appears in passages like Matthew 22:4 and Mark 14:15, often relating to preparing meals or arrangements.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἑτοιμάζω

(< ἕτοιμος),

[in LXX chiefly for כּוּן hi. (Hatch, Essays, 51 ff.) ;]

to prepare, make ready;

absol., of hospitable preparation: Mk 14:15, Lk 9:52 12:47 22:9, 12; c. inf., Mt 26:17; ἵνα, Mk 14:12;

c. acc rei: Mt 22:4 26:19, Mk 14:16, Lk 12:20 17:8 22:8, 13 23:56 24:1, Jo 14:2-3, Phm 22, Re 9:7 16:12; seq. εἰς, II Ti 2:21; of God's ordaining coming events (Dalman, Words, 128)…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἑτοιμάζω ; fut. ἑτοιμάσω ; 1 aor. ἡτοίμασα ; pf. ἡτοίμακα (Mt. xxii. 4 LT Tr WH); Pass., pf. ἡτοίμασμαι; 1 aor. ἡτοιμάσθην; (ἔτοιμος) ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. very often for }213 and 7.33; to make ready, prepare: absol. to make the necessary preparations, get everything ready, Lk. xii. 47; of preparing a feast, Lk. xxii. 9, 12, (Gen. xliii. 15; 1 Chr. xii. 39); w. dat. of pers.,for one: of preparing a lodging, Lk. ix. 52 [W. 594 (552); B. § 130, 5]; a supper, Mk. xiv. 15; also w. a telic inf. added, Mt. xxvi. 17; foll. by ἵνα [ef. B. 237 (205)], Mk. xiv. 12; w. ace. of the thing: ἃ ἡτοίμασας the things which thou hast prepared (as a store), Lk. xii. 20; [ri δειπνήσω, Lk. xvii. '8]; τὸ ἄριστον, Mt. xxii. 4; τὸ πάσχα, Mt. xxvi. 19; Mk. xiv. 16; Lk. xxii. 8,13; ἀρώματα, Lk. xxiii. 56; xxiv. 1; τόπον Twi, In. xiv. 2 sq.; ξενίαν, Philem. 22; [συμβούλιον, Mk. xv. 1 TWH mrg., cf. cupB.]; τὴν…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἑτοιμάζω. P Petr II. 4o(a)!® (11118.6.} (= Witkowski’, p. 41) ἑτοιpaterar yap ἡ διαδοχή, ‘‘the relief is being equipped,” P Lille I. 264 (iii/B.c.) τὴν δὲ λοιπὴν γῆν ἑτο]ιμάζω, of preparing land by cultivation, PSI 1V. 43417 (B.c. 261-0) ἑτοιμάζονται θηρεύειν, P Hib I. 479 (B.c. 256) καὶ ὄλυραν δὲ κ[αὶ κρ]ιθὴν ἑτοίμαζε ἵνα [παραμ]ετρήσωμεν εἰς τὸ βασιλικόν, ‘prepare both olyra and barley in order that we may measure it to the State” (Edd.). The verb is almost a ¢.4 for preparations in view of an approaching visit, e.g. P Tebt 11. 592 (iii/a.D.) ἐπιστολ]ήν σοι ἔπεμψα ὡς σοῦ ταχὺ ἐρχομέν[ο]υ καὶ ἑτοιμάκιν (1. ἡτοιμάκειν) σοι πάντα, P Oxy Χ. 1299° (iv/A.D.) ἑτυμάσο αὐτὼ (/. ἑτοιμάσω αὐτὸ) ἕως ἔρχῃ, “1 will prepare it for your coming ᾿ (Edd.), 76. XII. 14907 (late iii/a.D.) ἐπίστειλον τί θέλεις ἑτοιμασθῆναι, ‘ give instructions as to what preparations you wish to be made” (Edd.): cf. Philem…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἑτοιμάζω (hetoimazō) — to make ready.

ἑτοιμ-άζω,

perfect ἡτοίμακα [Refs 2nd c.BC+]perfect passive ἡτοίμασμαι both in middle and passive sense see below): (ἑτοῖμος):—get ready, prepare, ἐμοὶ γέρας αὐτίχ᾽ ἑτοιμάσατ᾽ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; [νέας] [NT+5th c.BC+]; δάκρυα δ᾽ ἑτοιμάζουσι to those furnishing them, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἑαυτὸν ἵνα.. [NT]

II. middle, cause to be prepared, ὄφρ᾽ ἱρὸν ἑτοιμασσαίατ᾽ Ἀθήνῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]

II.2. with perfect passive ἡτοίμασμαι, prepare for oneself, τἄλλα ἡτοιμάζετο made his other arrangements, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.3. prepare oneself, make oneself ready, with infinitive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἑτοιμάζω

hetoimazo

from 2092; to prepare:--prepare, provide, make ready. Compare 2680.

see GREEK for 2092

see GREEK for 2680

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἑτοιμάζω

v.

I make ready, prepare

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἑτοιμάζω hetoimazō 40x

to make ready, prepare, Mt. 22:4; 26:17

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἑτοιμάζω ἑτοιμάζω, ἑτοῖμος to make or get ready, prepare, provide, Il., Hdt., attic; c. inf., κάπρον ἑτοιμασάτω ταμέειν Il.

Mid. to cause to be prepared, id. Il.

with perf. pass. ἡτοίμασμαι, to prepare for oneself, τἄλλα ἡτοιμάζετο made his other arrangements, Thuc.; ἡτοιμασμένοι Xen.

to prepare oneself, c. inf., id. Xen.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-RPP-ASF — Verb · perfect · passive · participle · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-RPP-ASF Part of Speech: Verb Tense: peRfect Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
23%do prepare
do prepare23% · 9×prepared23% · 9×they prepared8% · 3×it has been prepared5% · 2×we may prepare5% · 2×make ready5% · 2×prepare5% · 2×has prepared3% · 1×other renderings25% · 10×

40 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 18 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 41 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἸησοῦςJesusπορεύομαιI travel, journe
ὅς
ἀλλάbut, exceptφέρωI carry, bear, b
ἔρημοςdeserted, desolate,
Article the
Article the
κληρονομέωI inherit, obtaiαἰώνιοςeternal, unendinἄγγελοςan angel, messen
αὐτός
εἶπονI say, speakἐπικαλέωI call by an addγυνήa woman, wife, m
ἑτοιμάζωprepared41×
what comes after →
Article the
ὁδόςa way, road, jouπάσχαAramταῦροςa bull, an ox
ἐγώ
Article theξενίαlodging, hospita
σύ
βασιλείαkingship, sovereἐσθίωI eat
τίςIrg
εἰμίI am, existδειπνέωI dine
ἄρωμαspice, perfume
καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἑτοιμάζω · 41× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Mark John 1 Corinthians 2 Timothy Acts Hebrews Philemon
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 91 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas The Didache The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn Noah's Work as a Planter 47c. AD 40

„εἰσαγαγὼν καταφύτευσον αὐτοὺς εἰς ὄρος κληρονομίας σου, εἰς ἕτοιμον κατοικητήριόν σου ὃ κατειργάσω, κύριε, ἁγίασμα, κύριε, ὃ ἡτοίμασαν αἱ χεῖρές σου·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 17.73c. AD 75–95

κεκόμισται γὰρ ἐκ τῆς Αἰγύπτου τὸ φάρμακον ὑπʼ Ἀντιφίλου, ἀδελφὸς δʼ ἐκείνῳ ἰατρὸς ὢν ἐπόρισεν, καὶ Θευδίωνος ὡς ἡμᾶς κομίσαντος ἐφύλασσον αὐτὴ παρὰ Φερώρου λαβοῦσα ἐπὶ σὲ ἡτοιμασμένον ὑπὸ Ἀντιπάτρου.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 3.6c. AD 100

εἰς τοῦτο οὖν, ἀδελφοί, ὁ μακρόθυμος προβλέψας, ὡς ἐν ἀκεραιοσύνῃ πιστεύσει ὁ λαός, ὃν ἡτοίμασεν ἐν τῷ ἠγαπημένῳ αὐτοῦ, προεφανέρωσεν ἡμῖν περὶ πάντων, ἵνα μὴ προσρησσώμεθα ὡς ἐπήλυτοι τῷ ἐκείνων νόμῳ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P. Cairo Cat. 10532 descr.Arsinoites (?)AD 1–AD 50

τοῦ τόκου ἃς ὀφείλει Πανουβᾶς οὐ δέδωκε Κιεύριος. ἐν ὅσῳ ἀναπλεῖς εἰς τὸν διαλογισμόν, ἡτοίμακά σοι τὸ ἱμάτιον. εὐχαριστῶ σοι διʼ Ἀννούβιδος θεοῦ μεγίστου τῶν θεῶν πάντων.

π … ρον τὸν βαστάζοντα ὑμεῖν … … πάσχεις τὴν … … στην … ἑτοίμασόν τι τῇ θυγατρὶ … γαμεῖ Π … … πει. ἀσπάζομαί σε

σῖτον. λοιπὸν εἰ ἐκδημήσῃ, οὐ δύναμαι ἐλθεῖν πρὸς σέ. ἄρτους γὰρ αὐτῷ ποιῶ καὶ ἑτοιμάζω αὐτόν. ἀσπάζομαι Ταπεῆιν καὶ Ἀπλωνάριν καὶ ὑποδησμεύετε αὐτὴν διὰ σκορπίον. ἀσπάζεται ὑμᾶς Ἰουλᾶς. ἐὰν

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
ὑμῖνsu for you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · dative · plural
2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.
Tyndale gloss
you
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-2DP — Personal pronoun · second person · dative · plural
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2DP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Dative Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
78%you
you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg
ἐν
Article theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
πρός
ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de
σύfor you2892×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
ἐν
Article theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
βασιλείανbasileia kingdom G932 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
162× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The kingdom refers to God's royal power and dominion, as described in Luke 1:33 and John 18:36, where Jesus' authority is recognized as being from God.
Amplified meaning
royal power, dominion
Tyndale gloss
kingdom
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word βασιλεία (*basileia*) means 'kingdom' and is derived from βασιλεύω (*basileuo*), which relates to royal power and dominion. It encompasses both abstract concepts of sovereignty and concrete territories ruled by a king. In the New Testament, it frequently refers to the kingdom of God or the Messiah's reign, appearing in various contexts, including present and future aspects of the kingdom.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

βασιλεία, -ας, ἡ

(< βασιλεύω),

[in LXX chiefly for מַמְלָכָה מַלְכוּת;]

prop. abstract, sovereignty, royal power, dominion: Lk 1:33 22:29, Jo 18:36, Ac 1:6, He 1:8, I Co 15:24; λαβεῖν β., Lk 19:12, 15, Re 17:12; δοῦναι τὴν, Re 17:17; ἔχειν β., Re 17:18; ἔρχεσθαι ἐν τ. (εἰς τὴν) β., Mt 16:28, Lk 23:42; β. τ. θεοῦ, Re…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

βασιλεία, -as, ἡ, (fr. βασιλεύω ; to be distinguished fr. βασίλεια a queen; cf. iepeia priesthood fr. iepedw, and ἱέρεια a priestess fr. ἱερεύς), [fr. Hdt.down]; 1. royal power, kingship, dominion, rule: Lk. i. 33; xix. 12, 15; xxii. 29; Jn. xviii. 36; Acts i. 6; Heb. i. 8; 1 Co. xv. 24; Rev. xvii. 12; of the royal power of Jesus as the triumphant Messiah, in the phrase ἔρχεσθαι ἐν τῇ Bac. αὐτοῦ, i. 6. to come in his kingship, clothed with this power: Mt. xvi. 28; Lk. xxiii. 42 [εἰς τὴν 8. L mrg. Tr mrg. WH txt.]; of the royal power and dignity conferred on Christians in the Messiah’s kingdom: Rev. i. 6 (ace. to Tr txt. WH mre. ἐποίησεν ἡμῖν or L ἡμῶν [yet RG TWH txt. Tr mrg. ἡμᾶς] βασιλείαν [Rec. βασιλεῖς); τοῦ θεοῦ, the royal power and dignity belonging to God, Rev. xu. 10. 2. a kingdom i. 6. the territory subject to the rule of a king: Mt. xii. 25 sq.; xxiv. 7; Mk. iii. 24; vi. 23…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

βασιλεία. As kingship or sovranty in the abstract is necessarily the root meaning of this word, it is easy to see how the passage into the concrete could either be on the lines of our domznzon (cf. “four Sovereign and his dominions”), or follow the outward and visible szex of royalty. All these three meanings are fully illustrated from the inscriptions by Dittenberger in the Index to OG/S, e.g. (1) 331% (ii/B.c.) ty ἔτει τῆς ἐκείνου βασιλείας, (2) 248!° (ii/B.c.) μέχρι τῶν ὁρίων τῆς ἰδίας βασιλείας, and (3) go (Rosetta Stone, B.c. 196) τὰς τοῦ βασιλέως χρυσᾶς βασιλείας δέκα. It is possible that some passages in the NT might gain in force if this last meaning ‘‘a sign of royalty ” were substituted for ‘‘ royalty” in the abstract—one might compare the line taken by the Reyisers with ἐξουσία in 1 Cor 111%. But it may be doubted whether the change can be made very plausible in auy case. For…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

βασιλεία (basileia) — kingdom.

βᾰσιλ-είᾱ,

Ionic dialect βᾰσιλ-ηΐη, ἡ, kingdom, dominion, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; hereditary monarchy, opposed to τυραννίς, ἐπὶ ῥητοῖς γέρασι πατρικαὶ β. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ πρώτη πολιτεία μετὰ τὰς β. after the age of monarchies, [NT]

2. kingly office, β. καὶ στρατηγία [Refs 4th c.BC+]

3. at Athens, the office of the archon βασιλεύς, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

4. passive, being ruled by a king, τῆς ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνου βασιλείας [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. diadem, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

III. reign, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; so αἱ β. the reigns of the Kings, title of book of “VT”; accession to the throne, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

IV. concrete, His Majesty, [LXX]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

βασιλεία

basileia

from 935; properly, royalty, i.e. (abstractly) rule, or (concretely) a

realm (literally or figuratively):--kingdom,

+ reign.

see GREEK for 935

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

βασιλεία, ας, ἡ

n.f.

kingship, sovereignty, authority, rule, kingdom

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

βασιλεία basileia 162x

a kingdom, realm, the region or country governed by a king; kingly power, authority, dominion, reign; royal dignity, the title and honor of king; ἡ βασιλεία, Mt. 9:35, ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ or τοῦ Χριστοῦ or τοῦ οὐρανοῦ or τῶν οὐρανῶν, the reign or kingdom of the Messiah, both in a false and true conception of it; used also with various limitation, of its administration and coming history, as in the parables; its distinctive nature, Rom. 14:17; its requirements, privileges, rewards, consummation

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

βασιλεία βασιλεύω a kingdom, dominion, Hdt.: hereditary monarchy, opp. to τυραννίς, Thuc., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
98%kingdom
kingdom98% · 160×other renderings2% · 4×

164 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject40%adverbial32%object27%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 162 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰμίI am, existἐνεἰς
καίand, even, also, nam
ἔθνοςa race, people, θλῖψιςpersecution, aff
ἐπί
βασιλείαkingship, sovere
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, ποιέωI do, makeθεόςGod, a god
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
αὐτός
βασιλείαkingdom162×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godοὐρανόςthe sky, the heaπατήρfather, Father,
αὐτός
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
καίand, even, also, nam
θεραπεύωI care for, atteArticle theμήNeg
ἐπί
βασιλείαkingship, sovereἑαυτοῦArticle the
σύ
γίνομαιI come into bein

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceβασιλεία · 162× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke Mark Revelation Acts 1 Corinthians John Hebrews 2 Timothy Colossians 1 Thessalonians 2 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament17 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 158 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 148c. AD 40

σοφίας γὰρ καὶ βασιλείας τὸ ἔργον, σοφὸς δ’ ἐκεῖνος αὐτομαθὴς καὶ αὐτοδίδακτος, χερσὶ θείαις γενόμενος, καὶ προσέτι βασιλεύς·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.295c. AD 75–95

Ἰάκωβος δὲ πᾶσαν αὐτῷ τὴν αἰτίαν διηγεῖτο λέγων Ἰσάκῳ γενέσθαι παῖδας διδύμους αὐτόν τε καὶ Ἡσαῦν, ὃν ἐπεὶ τῶν τοῦ πατρὸς εὐχῶν διήμαρτε σοφίᾳ τῆς μητρὸς εἰς αὐτὸν γενομένων, ἀποκτεῖναι ζητεῖν αὐτὸν ὡς ἀφῃρημένον τῆς παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ βασιλείας καὶ…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.13c. AD 100

ἵνα μήποτε ἐπαναπαύομενοι ὡς κλητοὶ ἐπικαθυπνώσωμεν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ἡμῶν, καὶ ὁ πονηρὸς ἄρχων λαβὼν τὴν καθ̓ ἡμῶν ἐξουσίαν ἀπώσηται ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλείας τοῦ κυρίου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD
APF 7 (1924), p. 19-20Alexandria253 BC

κ … Πτολεμαιέως ἀπὸ Βάρκης … … ωδρ … μου οἱ δύο ἀγυιᾶς Ἀρσινόης Βασιλείας Ἐχεδήμωι … συνταγματάρχηι ἀγυιᾶς Ἀρσινόης. … ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς ἑκατόν . ἀποδότω δὲ Ἐχέδαμος Νέαι

P.Cair. Zen. 4 59707Philadelphia? (Arsinoites)276 BC–227 BC

α 𐅵 γίνεται 𐅵 χοίνικες ϛ 𐅵 καθαρῶν ἐπὶ τράπεζαν τοῖς κεκλημένοις εἰς τὰ Βασίλεια 𐅵 δ χοίνικες ζ γίνεται ἀρτάβη α 𐅵 δ χοίνικες δ σπλαγχνι … ν

P.Petra 3 23Petra (Tertia Palaestina Salutaris)AD 544

βασιλείας τοῦ θειοτάτου καὶ εὐσεβεστάτου ἡμῶν δεσπότου Φλαουίου Ἰουστινιανοῦ τοῦ αἰωνίου καὶ αὐτοκράτορος Αὐγούστου ἔτους

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
ἀπὸapo from [the] G575 Preposition
647× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means moving away from something, like a place or a time. It's used in many parts of the Bible, like Matthew 5:29 and Luke 5:2, to show movement or separation. It can also mean because of something.
Tyndale gloss
away from
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀπό (transliterated as apo) is a preposition meaning 'from' or 'away from,' typically used with the genitive case. It covers a wide range of meanings, including separation, origin, and partitive sense, as well as indicating distance in time or place. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as indicating motion from a place or the source of something. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπό (on the freq. neglect of elision bef. vowels, v. Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146),

prep. c. gen. (WM, 462 ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, WM, 456 f.),

[in LXX for מִן, בְּ, לְ;]

from (i.e. from the exterior).

Of separation and cessation;

of motion from a place: Mt 5:29, 30 7:23, Lk 5:2 22:41, al.;

in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, s.v.; Bl., § 40, 2), Mt 9:16 27:21, Jo 21:10, Ac 5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.;

of alienation (cl. gen. of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Ro 9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀπό, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive, (Lat. a, ab, abs, Germ. von, ab, weg, [ef. Eng. of, off ]), Jrom, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr. 1 is traceable, cf. W. 364 sy. (342), 369 (346) sqq.; B. 321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words beginning with a vowel see Τὰ Proleg. p. 94; cf. W. § 5,1a.; B. p.10sq.; WH. App. p. 146.] In order to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples, but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by this preposition. ἀπό, then, is used I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation, after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, fleeing, removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see αἴρω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀποτινάσσω, ἀποχωρέω, ἀφίστημι, φεύγω. etc.) : ἀπεσπάσθη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii.41; βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ. Mt. ν. 29 sq.3 ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἀπὸ [LT Tr WH ἐκ] τοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀπό. In this and the other prepositions cf very wide and general use we have not pretended to any fullness: they would afford abundant material for a fair-sized treatise. We only notice such special uses as we have remarked in our reading, and have therefore passed over most of the common and obvious uses. On ἀπό there are some illustrations in Prodeg. which may be recalled with some additions. There is the partitive use (pp. 102, 245), still current in MGr: so P Petr III. 11%° (B.c. 234) ddeloO[w] ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων μοι [σ]ωμάτων [ἐλ]εύθερα A. kal’A., 2d. 11. τα (1)> (= Selections p- 7) (iii/B.c.) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ . . . τὸ δὲ λοιπόν κτλ. P Tebt II. 209013 (c. a.D. 50) ἀπολυσίμ[ο]υ ἀπὸ av8[pav πεντή]κοντα ‘one of the 50 exempted persons” (Edd.), P Iand 8° (ii/A.p.) διεπεμψάμην cor. . ἀϊπὸ τοῦ οἸΐνου Κ νίδια τρία, etc. To Kuhring’s scanty exx. (p. 37) for ἀπό of agent (cf. Proleg.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀπό (apo) — away from.

ἀπό,

Aeolic dialect, Thess., [Refs 7th c.BC+], etc.:—preposition usually with Gen. but see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Cf. Sanskrit

__A ápa, Latin ab, Umbr. ap-ehtre 'ab extra', Gothic af, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] af, cef, of, etc.) Orig. sense, from. [ᾰπο?~X: where ἀπο ¯ is found in Epic dialect before see or liquids (as ἀπὸ ἕθεν[Refs 8th c.BC+] was sometimes written in later texts,[Refs] — ᾱ for the sake of meter in _Epic dialect_ compounds, such as ἀπονέεσθαι.]

__A.I OF PLACE, the earliest, and in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.I.1 of Motion, from, away from, ἐσσεύοντο νεῶν ἄπο καὶ κλισιάων[Refs 8th c.BC+]; pleonastic, ἀ. Τροίηθεν[LXX+8th c.BC+]; also ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο, implying departure from life, [Refs]; opposed to ἐξ, of relatively superficial motion, λαμβάνομεν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν, οὔτ᾽ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; similarly…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀπό

apo

a primary particle; "off," i.e. away (from something near), in various

senses (of place, time, or relation; literal or figurative):--(X

here-)after, ago, at, because of, before, by (the space of), for(-th),

from, in, (out) of, off, (up-)on(-ce), since, with. In composition (as

a prefix) it usually denotes separation, departure, cessation,

completion, reversal, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀπό

Prep.

from, away from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀπό apo 646x

pr. forth, from, away from; hence, it variously signifies departure; distance of time or place; avoidance; riddance; derivation from a quarter, source, or material; origination from agency or instrumentality

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀπό from, away from. c. gen.

prep. c. gen. = Lat. ab, from.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, from, away from, Hom., etc.; of warriors fighting from chariots, Hom.

of Position, away from, far from, apart from, ἀπὸ ἧς ἀλόχοιο Il.; ἀπ᾽ ὀφθαλμῶν far from sight, id. Il.; ἀπὸ θαλάσσης Thuc., etc.

of the mind, ἀπὸ θυμοῦ away from, i. e. alien from, my heart, Il.; οὐκ ἀπὸ τρόπου not without reason, Plat.; οὐκ ἀπὸ πράγματος Dem.

in partitive sense, αἶσ᾽ ἀπὸ ληΐδος a part from the booty, a share of it, Od.

OF TIME, from, after, ἀπὸ δείπνου after supper, Il.; ἀπὸ δείπνου γενέσθαι to have done supper, Hdt., etc.; ἀφ᾽ οὗ (sc. χρόνου), Lat. ex quo, id. Hdt., etc.

OF ORIGIN, CAUSE, etc.:

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
82%from
from82% · 556×of7% · 48×by3% · 22×other renderings8% · 51×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial91%subject5%predicate2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 647 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐκπορεύομαιI journey out, cἀπόλαόςa people, the cr
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰμίI am, existτρεῖςthreeδεκατέσσαρεςfourteen
Article the
τὶςγινώσκωI come to know, ἸησοῦςJesus
ἐγώ
ὥστεso that, therefoκαθαρίζωI make cleanῥύομαιI rescue
εἰρήνηpeace, peace of mind
καίand, even, also,ἔλεοςpity, mercyμετά
ἀπόfrom [the]647×
what comes after →
Article the
ΓαλιλαίαGalileeθεόςGod, a godἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, bec
σύ
καίand, even, also,συμφέρωI collect, am prκαλόςbeautiful, good,
θεόςGod, a god
πατήρfather, Father, ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oἔρχομαιI come, go
ἀρχήruler, beginning
ἵναin order that, sκτίσιςcreation, creatuArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀπό · 647× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts Mark John Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ὅθεν οὐκ ἀπὸ σκοποῦ καὶ τὴν γένεσιν ἀνέγραψεν αὐτοῦ μάλα σεμνῶς θεολογήσας.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς παστοφορίου ὠκοδομημένου καὶ δεδοκωμένου καὶ τεθυρωμένου ἐν τῷ

P.Amh. 2 51Pathyris89 BC

ἔτους κϛ Μεσορὴι κη. ἀπέδοτο Πετεῆσις Πατῆτος Πελαίαι Εὐνόου τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου μέρει Παθύρεως οἰκίαν ᾠκοδομημένην καὶ δεδοκωμένην καὶ τεθυρωμένην ἧς αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
καταβολῆςkatabolē foundation G2602 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
11× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Beginning can mean a founding or conception. In Hebrews, it refers to the conception of a child, while in Matthew and Revelation, it means the foundation of the world.
Amplified meaning
beginning, creation
Tyndale gloss
beginning
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word καταβολή (katabole) is derived from the verb καταβάλλω and generally means a laying down or foundation. It encompasses concepts such as the act of sowing or depositing, particularly in relation to conception, as seen in Hebrews 11:11. The term is used metaphorically in the New Testament to refer to foundational aspects of the world, appearing in verses like Matthew 13:35 and Ephesians 1:4.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

** κατα-βολή, -ῆς, ἡ

(< καταβάλλω),

[in LXX: II Mac 2:29*;]

a laying down: εἰς κ. σπέρματος, He 11:11 (EV, to conceive seed).

a foundation (of a house, II Mac 2:29): metaph., ἀπὸ κ. κόσμου, Mt 13:35(LXX) (om. κόσμου, WH, R, mg.), Mt 25:34, Lk 11:50, He 4:3 9:26, Re 13:8 17:8; πρὸ κ. κόσμου, Jo 17:24, Eph 1:4, I Pe 1:20.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κατα-βολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (καταβάλλω, q. V-); ing or laying down: τοῦ σπέρματος (sc. εἰς τὴν μήτραν), the injection or depositing of the virile semen in the womb, Leian. amor. 19; Galen, aphorism. iv. § 1; of the seed of animals and plants, Philo de opif. mund. §§ 22, 45; σπέρματα τὰ εἰς γῆν ἢ μήτραν καταβαλλόμενα, Antonin. 4, 36; accordingly many interpret the words Σάρρα δύναμιν eis καταβολὴν σπέρματος ἔλαβε in Heb. xi. 11, she received power to conceive seed. But since it belongs to the male καταβάλλειν τὸ σπέρμα, not to the female, this interpretation cannot stand [ (ace. to the reading of WH mre. αὐτῇ Σάρρᾳ, Abr. remains the subj. of AaBev; but see 2 below)]; οἵ. Bleek [and, on the other side, Kurtz] ad loc. 2. a founding (laying down a foundation): eis καταβ. σπέρματος, to found a posterity, Heb. xi. 11 [but ef. above] (τυραννίδος, Polyb. 13, 6, 2; dua τῇ πρώτῃ καταβολῇ τῶν ἀνθρώπων…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

καταβολή. Like its verb (see s.v. καταβάλλω) this noun is frequently found in the sense of ‘‘ payment,”’ e.g. P Par 62¥- 18 (c. B.C. 170) τῶν St καταβολῶν σύμβολα λαμβανέτωσαν παρὰ τοῦ τραπεζίτου, BGU IV. 1135® (prob. B.c. 10) τῇ μην[ιαίᾳ κ]αταβολῇ, P Lond 1171 verso! (A.D. 42) (= III. p. 106) is καταβολὴν τῷ ἐγλήμπτορι τοῦ μέλιτος καὶ κηροῦ, P Strass I. 26! (iv/a.D.) ἡ γὰρ προθεσμία τῆς καταβολῆς συνέστηκεν. See also P Eleph 23'8 (B.C. 223--2) with reference to land ἔχειν pe ταύτης προσβολὴν καὶ κατ[α]βολήν, ἃ καὶ ἐπιδέδειχά σοι. With the noun in Heb 11" cf. καταβολαῖος used of a “‘ store-place,”” P Fay 110% % (A.D. 94).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καταβολή (katabolē) — beginning.

καταβολ-ή, ἡ,

throwing down: hence, sowing, [Refs]; especially of begetting, κ. σπέρματος, σπερμάτων, [NT+5th c.BC+]; ἡ Ῥωμύλου σπορὰ καὶ κ. [Refs 1st c.AD+]

__b congenital defect, ἀπὸ ξυγγενικῆς αἰτίας καὶ κ. [Refs 1st c.AD+]

__c Astrology texts, nativity, ἡ ἐξ ἀρχῆς κ. [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. paying down, especially by instalments, καταβάλλειν τὰς κ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τὸ ἀργύριον ἔφερε καταβολὴν τῇ πόλει paid money as a deposit (by way of caution),[Refs 2nd c.BC+], etc.; ἔχειν τῆς γῆς.. καταβολήν liability for rent, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: plural, instalments, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

II. laying of a foundation: hence, building, structure, [LXX+3rd c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καταβολή

katabole

from 2598; a deposition, i.e. founding; figuratively,

conception:--conceive, foundation.

see GREEK for 2598

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καταβολή, ῆς, ἡ

n.f.

a foundation, depositing, sowing

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καταβολή katabolē 11x

pr. a casting down; laying the foundation, foundation; beginning, commencement, Mt. 13:35; 25:34; conception in the womb, Heb. 11:11

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

καταβολή καταβολή, ἡ, καταβάλλω a throwing or laying down, NTest.

metaph.,

a foundation, beginning, Pind., NTest.

a paying down, by instalments, Dem.

a periodical attack of illness, a fit, access, Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

foun-da'-shun:

In Hebrew the words for "foundation" are mostly derivatives from yacadh, "to found," and in Greek two words are used: one, katabole, of "foundation of the world" (Mr 13:35; 15:34; Lu 11:50; Joh 17:24, etc.); the other, themelios, of the foundation of a building (Lu 6:48,49; 14:29; Ac 16:26, etc.), in which sense it is also used metaphorically in various connections (Christ the foundation of the church, 1Co 3:11; or the apostles and prophets the foundation, with Christ as corner-stone, Eph 2:20; the…

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- The lowest part of a building, and on which it rests

Lu 14:29; Ac 16:26

- FIGURATIVELY APPLIED TO

. The heavens

2Sa 22:8

. The earth

Job 38:4; Ps 104:5

. The world

Ps 18:15; Mt 13:35

. The mountains

De 32:22

. The ocean

Ps 104:8

. Kingdoms

Ex 9:18

- LAID FOR

. Cities

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
82%foundation
foundation82% · 9×conception9% · 1×founding9% · 1×

11 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 11 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἀπό
κρύπτωI hide, conceal,βασιλείαkingship, sovereἐκχέωI pour out, shed
πρό
ἐγώαὐτόςμένDisj
εἰς
δύναμιςmight, power, ma
καταβολήfoundation11×
what comes after →
κόσμοςthe world, universe
ἀπόεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
σπέρμαseed, offspring
λαμβάνωI receive, take

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαταβολή · 11× in the New Testament
Hebrews Matthew Revelation 1 Peter Ephesians John Luke
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn Sobriety 45c. AD 40

ὡς γάρ, οἶμαι, καταβολὴ πυρετοῦ νόσος ἐστὶν οὐ μέρους ἀλλ’ ὅλου σώματος, οὕτως ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς ἀρρώστημά ἐστι κακία.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 12.64c. AD 75–95

Ὑποστησάμενοι τοίνυν ποιήσασθαι τὴν τράπεζαν δύο μὲν καὶ ἡμίσους πηχῶν τὸ μῆκος, ἑνὸς δὲ τὸ εὖρος, τὸ δʼ ὕψος ἑνὸς καὶ ἡμίσους, κατεσκεύαζον ἐκ χρυσοῦ τὴν ὅλην τοῦ ἔργου καταβολὴν ποιούμενοι.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.5c. AD 100

ἔτι δὲ καὶ τοῦτο, ἀδελφοί μου: εἰ ὁ κύριος ὑπέμεινεν παθεῖν περὶ τῆς ψυχῆς ἡμῶν, ὢν παντὸς τοῦ κόσμου κύριος ᾧ εἶπεν ὁ θεὸς ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου: Ποιήσωμεν ἄνθρωπον κατ̓ εἰκόνα καὶ καθ̓ ὁμοίωσιν ἡμετέραν: πῶς οὖν ὑπέμεινεν ὑπὸ χειρὸς ἀνθρώπων παθεῖν;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 7th c. AD 5th c. AD 8th c. AD 2nd c. AD
P.Lond. 2 p. 163-165 no. 354Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites8 BC–5 BC

κατʼ ἔτος εἰς λόγον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας ω καὶ ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς Αφ. καὶ ἐν τῆι καταβολῇ ἀνέγκλητοι μέχρι τοῦ νῦν γεγονότες, διὰ δὲ τὸ μηδὲν ὀφείλειν ἐπεφθονημένοι ὑπό τινων ἐκ

P.Lond. 3 p. 107-108 no. 906Euhemeria (Arsinoites)AD 128

παντὸς κατʼ ἔτος σύνπαντι λόγῳ ἀργυρίου δραχμῶν διακοσίων ἑξήκοντα τεσσάρων , ὧν καὶ τὴν καταβολὴν ποιησόμεθα κατὰ μῆνα ἕκαστον ταῖς ι κ λ τὸ αἱροῦν ἐξ ἴσου, τῶν εἰς

PSI 12 1236Philagris (Arsinoites)AD 128

πόλεως, ἀντίγραφον· ε ἔτους Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Τραιανοῦ Ἁδριανοῦ σεβαστοῦ διέγραψαν Εἰρηναῖος καὶ Ἥρων πράκτορες καταβολῇ μεθʼ ἕτερα, καὶ Ἐπεὶφ ιγ εἰς ἀρίθμησιν Παχὼν ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς τρισχιλίας· γίνονται δραχμαὶ Γ·

Then will say the King to those on [the] right hand of Him; Come you who [are] blessed of the Father of mine, do inherit the prepared for you kingdom from [the] foundation of [the] world.
κόσμου.kosmos of [the] world. G2889 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
185× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Matthew than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for world can mean an orderly arrangement or decoration, but also refers to the world and its inhabitants, as seen in Acts 17:24 and Romans 4:13.
Amplified meaning
earth
Tyndale gloss
world
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κόσμος (kosmos) is derived from a root meaning 'order' or 'decoration.' It encompasses a range of meanings from 'ornament' to 'the universe' and 'mankind.' In the New Testament, it refers to the material world, human society, and worldly affairs, with verses such as 1 Peter 3:3 highlighting its use for adornment. The term also carries ethical connotations, often contrasting the godly with the ungodly.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — κόσμος, αἰών from a scan

Κόσμος our Translators have rendered ‘ world’ in every instance but one (1 Pet. iii. 3); αἰών often, though by no means invariably so; for (not to speak of εἰς αἰῶνα) see Ephes. ii. 2, 7; Col.i. 26. It may be a question whether we might not have made more use of ‘age’ in our Version: we have employed it but rarely,—only, indeed, in the two places which I have cited last. ‘Age’ may sound to us inadequate now: but it is quite possible that, so used, it would little by little have expanded and adapted itself to the larger meaning of the Greek word for which it stood. One must regret that, by this or some other like device, our Translators did not mark the difference between κόσμος (=mundus), the world contemplated under aspects of space, and αἰών (=seculum), the same contemplated under aspects of time; for the Latin, no less than the Greek, has two words, where we have, or have acted as…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κόσμος, -ου, ὁ

[in LXX: Ge 2:1, De 4:19 17:3, Is 24:21 40:26 (צבא), Ex 33:5, 6, Je 2:32 4:30, Ez 7:20 16:11 23:40 (עֲדִי), Is 61:10 (כְּלִי), al., Wi 2:24 and freq., Si 6:30, al;]

order (Hom., Plat., al.).

ornament, adornment, esp. of women (Hom., al.): I Pe 3:3.

Later, the world or universe, as an ordered system (Plat., al.): Ac 17:24, Ro…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κόσμος, -ου, ὃ; 1. in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, an apt and harmonious arrangement or constitution, order. 2. asin Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down, ornament, decoration, adornment: évdicews ἱματίων, 1 Pet. iii. 3 (Sir. vi. 30; xxi. 21; 2 Mace. ii. 2: Sept. for nay of the arrangement of the stars, ‘the heavenly hosts,’ as the ornament of the heavens, Gen. ii. 1; Deut. iv. 19; xvii. 3; Is. xxiv. 21; xl. 26; besides occasionally for “y; twice for NINDA, Prov. xx. 29; Is. iii. 19). 3. the world, i. e. the universe (quem κόσμον Graeci nomine ornamenti appellarunt, eum nos a perfecta absolutaque elegantia mundum, Plin. h. n. 2, 3; in which sense Pythagoras is said to have been the first to use the word, Plut. de place. philos. 2, 1, 1 p. 886 ¢.; but ace. to other accounts he used it of the heavens, Diog. L. 8, 48, of which it is used several times also by other Grk. writ. [see Menag. on Diog.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κόσμος. Interesting exx. of ὁ κόσμος, ‘‘ the world,” are afforded by OG/S 4583 (c. B.C. 9) (= Priene 105), where the birthday of the divine Augustus is referred to as the beginning of good news to the world—ptev δὲ τῶι κόσμωι τῶν δι᾽ αὐτὸν εὐανγελίζων ἡ γενέθλιος] τοῦ θεοῦ, and Sy// 376%! where, on the occasion of the proclamation of the freedom of all the Greeks at the Isthmian games in a.D. 67, the Emperor Nero is described as 6 τοῦ παντὸς κόσμου κύριος Νέρων. With the hyperbolical usage in Rom 15. we may compare a sepulchral inscr, from Egypt, in which a certain Seratus states that he lies between mother and brother—éy καὶ ἡ σωφροσύνη κατὰ τὸν κόσμον λελάληται (Archiv ν. p. 169, No. 245): see also P Lond 98110 (iv/a.p.) (= III. p. 242, Chrest. I. p. 157) ἡ yap εὐφημία σου, πάτερ, περιεκύκλωσεν τὸν κ[όσ]μον ὅλον ὡς ἀγαθὸν marépa—a letter to a bishop. Other exx. of the word are ΟΟ 15…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κόσμος (kosmos) — world.

κόσμος, ὁ,

order, κατὰ κόσμον in order, duly, εὖ κατὰ κ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐ κατὰ κ. shamefully, [Refs 8th c.BC+] to sit in order, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. φέρειν bear becomingly, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κόσμῳ οὐδενὶ κοσμηθέντες in no sort of order, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φεύγειν, ἀπιέναι οὐδενὶ κ., [Refs], etc.; ἀτάκτως καὶ οὐδενὶ κ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐκέτι τὸν αὐτὸν κ. no longer in the same order, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: generally, of things, natural order, γίνεται τῶν τεταρταίων ἡ κατάστασις ἐκ τούτου τοῦ κ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. good order, good behaviour [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. χείρ, of a beggar, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; κοῖλος μήν short month, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἐξηγεομένων.. τὸν κ. αὐτοῦ the…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κόσμος

kosmos

probably from the base of 2865; orderly arrangement, i.e. decoration;

by implication, the world (in a wide or narrow sense, including its

inhabitants, literally or figuratively (morally)):--adorning, world.

see GREEK for 2865

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κόσμος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

the world, universe

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κόσμος kosmos 186x

(1) pr. order, regular disposition; ornament, decoration, embellishment, 1 Pet. 3:3; (2) the world, the material universe, Mt. 13:35; the world, the aggregate of sensitive existence, 1 Cor. 4:9; the lower world, the earth, Mk. 16:15; the world, the aggregate of mankind, Mt. 5:14; the world, the public, Jn. 7:4; in NT the present order of things, the secular world, Jn. 18:36; the human race external to the Jewish nation, the heathen world, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κόσμος κόσμος, ου, order, κόσμῳ and κατὰ κόσμον in order, duly, Il., etc.; μὰψ ἀτὰρ οὐ κατὰ κόσμον id. Il.; οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ in no sort of order, Hdt., attic

good order, good behaviour, decency, Aesch., Dem.

the form, fashion of a thing, Od., Hdt.

of states, order, government, Hdt., Thuc.

an ornament, decoration, embellishment, dress, Il., etc.; esp. of women, Lat. mundus muliebris, id. Il., Hes., etc.:—in pl. ornaments, Aesch., etc.

metaph. honour, credit, Hdt., Soph., etc.

a regulator, title of the chief magistrate in Crete, Arist.

the world or universe, from its perfect order, Lat. mundus, Plat., etc.

mankind, as we use "the world," NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The earth on which we dwell, 1Sa 2:8; its inhabitants, Joh 3:16, or a large number of them, Joh 12:19. In several places it is equivalent to "land," meaning the Roman Empire, or Judea and its vicinity, Lu 2:1 4:3 Ac 11:28. It also denotes the objects and interests of time and sense, Ga 6:14 1Jo 2:15.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ See EARTH

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
98%world
world98% · 183×other renderings2% · 4×

187 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial34%subject23%object21%predicate18%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 185 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰςἐνἐκ
καταβολήa foundation, deposi
ἀπόπρό
ἐν
εἰμίI am, existεἴδωλονan idol, false gφωστήρa light, brillia
ἀρχήruler, beginning
ἀπό
δέbut, on the other ha
Article the
κόσμοςof [the] world.185×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theὅςἀγαπάωI love
οὗτος
ἔρχομαιI come, goβλέπωI look, seeεἰς
εἰμίI am, exist
ἐγώκαίand, even, also,φῶςlight, a source
Article the
δέbut, on the otheἀκολουθέωI accompany, attποίημαa thing made
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existδύναμαιI am powerful, aφείδομαιI spare, abstain

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκόσμος · 185× in the New Testament
John 1 John 1 Corinthians Romans Matthew 2 Peter Hebrews James Colossians 1 Peter 1 Timothy 2 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament20 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 24 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 3c. AD 40

ἡ δ’ ἀρχή, καθάπερ ἔφην, ἐστὶ θαυμασιωτάτη κοσμοποιίαν περιέχουσα, ὡς καὶ τοῦ κόσμου τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τοῦ νόμου τῷ κόσμῳ συνᾴδοντος καὶ τοῦ νομίμου ἀνδρὸς εὐθὺς ὄντος κοσμοπολίτου πρὸς τὸ βούλημα τῆς φύσεως τὰς πράξεις ἀπευθύνοντος, καθ’ ἣν καὶ ὁ σύμπας…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.12c. AD 100

ὁ κύριος ἀπροσωπολήμπτως κρινεῖ τὸν κόσμον.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Oxy. 76 5098OxyrhynchosAD 1–AD 100

τοῦ κόσμου φυλάξας … … βοηθείας υ … … … ον … δὲ καὶ τοῦ μηδενα

P. Münch. 3 80Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 103–AD 114

τῶν ἐξ ἀμφοτέρων τέκνων μέρη δύο ἀκολούθως τῇ τῶν … ων γνώμῃ παρέξ γυναικείου κόσμου, ἐφʼ ὃν χρόνον περίεστι ὁ εἷς καὶ ἕκαστος αὐτῶν ὁλοσχερῆ ἐξουσίαν πωλεῖν ὑποτίθεσθαι χρᾶσθαι

P.Mil.Vogl. 2 84Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 138

δὲ δυσὶ θυγατρᾶσι Ταορσενούφι καὶ Τεφορσάϊτι, χωρὶς οὗ προφέρεται κατεσκευακέναι αὐταῖς χρυσοῦ καὶ ἀργύρου κόσμου καὶ ἱματισμοῦ, δοῦναι εἰς θαλλισμοῦ λόγον ἑκάστῃ ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς ε … , πρὸς τοὺς

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate